User’s Guide version 6.
04/04 Copyright 1998 - 2004 by Follett Software Company 1391 Corporate Drive McHenry, Illinois 60050 (800) 323-3397 or (815) 344-8700 Email: info@fsc.follett.com (Customer Service) techsupport@fsc.follett.com (Technical Support) All rights reserved. This book and application, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without permission. This software application and the information contained in this manual are subject to change without notice.
04/04 3 FOLLETT SOFTWARE COMPANY PRODUCT LICENSING TERMS ***IMPORTANT*** This legal document (the Agreement") is an agreement between you and Follett Software Company governing the use of Follett Software Company's library management products listed on Follett's Web sites, including at www.fsc.follett.com, and any revisions and updates (the Product"). The Product may include software, data, and/or other instructional materials.
04/04 5. New Versions. When you install a new version of the Product accompanied by a new license, provided your license fee entitles you to the new version, your use of the new version constitutes your acceptance of the new license and the termination of your license to use any previous version of the Product. 6. Termination for Breach.
04/04 5 Product, whether or not such modification is authorized by Follett Software Company. 11. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. FOLLETT SOFTWARE COMPANY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WARRANTY OF TITLE, OR WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT.
04/04 13. Arbitration. You agree to submit any dispute, controversy, or claim you may have arising out of or relating to this Agreement solely to binding arbitration to be conducted pursuant to the Commercial Rules of the American Arbitration then in effect. 14. Right to Audit Compliance.
04/04 7 disclosure is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Product clause at DFARS 52.227-7013. Manufacturer: Follett Software Company, 1391 Corporate Drive, McHenry, IL 60050-7041. 3. If the Product is acquired under a GSA Schedule, the U.S.
04/04 Notes
Contents Welcome 27 Getting started 28 Viewing the online User's Guide 28 Getting help 29 About our customized training 29 Contacting Follett Software Company 29 Follett's toll free number 29 Visit our Web site 30 Contacting Technical Support 30 What's follett talk? 30 Enhancement requests 30 System Setup 31 Chapter 1 System Setup basics 31 About the setup chapters 31 What you'll need 32 Getting around in System Setup 33 Chapter 2 Setting up your site 35 Identifying your library 35 Obtaining a MARC Or
04/04 How to change the PHD settings 43 Maintaining events for Catalog Plus 43 After setting up your site 44 Chapter 3 Preparing to catalog your collection 45 Grouping your collection according to lending period 45 How to add or edit circulation types 47 Identifying call number locations in your MARC records 47 Setting up your call number prefixes 48 How to add or edit call number prefixes 50 Sorting your call numbers 51 Increasing access to your collection with categories 52 How to add or edit catego
04/04 11 Setting up reserves 79 Entering the time limits 80 Activating automatic fine calculation and refunds 81 Customizing your overdue, bill, and ready hold notices 82 How to change the wording on a notice 83 Setting your library's hours 85 Setting up your library's current calendar 85 Setting up alert sounds (and more) for your circulation desk 88 After preparing for circulation 90 Chapter 6 Building your union 91 Who should read this? 91 Where do we begin? 91 What is data exchange? 92 Participation
04/04 Finding patrons or copies 123 Important messages for patrons 126 Sounds 126 Handling block conditions during a transaction 127 Adding or editing a patron record 129 Viewing and printing patron information 130 Viewing the current status of a copy 134 Sending items to the bindery or on inter library loan 135 Troubleshooting 136 Chapter 8 Checking out items 137 How to check out a copy 138 Adding or editing a patron 139 Adding a title during a checkout 139 Handling non circulating copies 141 Showing
04/04 13 Marking a patron's checkout lost 161 Charging a fine for the lost copy 163 Troubleshooting 164 Chapter 12 Managing holds 165 A brief introduction to holds 165 A brief introduction to reserves 166 Readying reserves 166 Circulating reserves 166 Getting around the Holds/Reserves window 167 Placing a hold or reserve for a patron 168 Managing holds 169 Extending the life of a hold 169 Changing the priority of a hold 170 Interpreting the Daily Holds Processing exception report Troubleshooting 174 171
04/04 How to add or edit a patron record 187 How to add, edit, and delete addresses 188 How to add or edit an important message or a note 189 How to add, replace, or remove a patron picture 189 How to delete individual patron records 190 Chapter 16 Maintaining patron records in batches 191 About global maintenance 191 Globally updating batches of patrons 191 Updating information for a few individual patrons Updating patron records using a PHD 193 Globally deleting patrons 195 Deleting patrons with a P
04/04 15 Starting and getting around in Inventory 215 Chapter 20 Taking inventory of your collection 217 Beginning an inventory 217 Entering copies into Inventory 218 Entering copies directly into the Inventory main window 219 Using a PHD to inventory your collection 221 Using a portable computer to inventory your collection 223 Interpreting the Remote Inventory exception report 228 Finalizing an inventory 230 Printing reports of your Missing items 231 Resetting Missing copies 231 Marking items Missing o
04/04 Chapter 22 Using the Easy Editor 255 When to use the Easy Editor 255 Working with bibliographic records 255 Brief MARC Record tab 256 Added Description tab 257 Providing access through subjects 259 Providing additional entries 260 Using the Find Headings feature 261 What's next? 262 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor 263 Working with bibliographic records 263 Adding new bibliographic records 264 The MARC Editor: an overview 265 What is a good" bibliographic record? 265 Tags: the backbone of a MAR
04/04 17 Chapter 26 Exporting MARC records 311 Getting ready to export 311 Exporting bibliographic records 312 Exporting authority records 318 Splitting a collection 318 Using a PHD 318 Using categories 319 Interpreting the exception report 321 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection 323 Using reports to analyze your collection 323 Updating bibliographic headings globally 324 Updating copy information globally 326 Adding funding sources or vendors to their tables 327 Updating individual copies 330 Deletin
04/04 Videorecordings 354 Electronic resources 355 Tag 856 Electronic Location and Access 355 System notes and considerations 357 Related materials 358 eBooks 360 Websites 366 Computer files 367 For further information 369 Chapter 29 Acquisitions 371 The life cycle of an order 371 Adding or editing an order 372 Filling out an order 372 Finding an order 375 Editing vendor information 376 Editing funding source information 377 Updating address information 378 Printing your order form 379 Alliance Plus
04/04 19 Running Process Misses 396 Search Stations 403 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations 403 Accessing Setup 403 General Setup tab 404 Choosing the OPAC interface 405 Controlling user access 406 Providing access to other applications 408 Setting up passwords 409 What's next? 409 Text OPAC Setup tab 410 Choosing search options 410 Modifying the record display 412 Selecting limiter options 412 What's next? 414 Visual OPAC Setup tab 415 Choosing display options 415 Selecting Bookbag options 416 Sa
04/04 Constructing the URL for the main page 432 Constructing the URL for the Setup Information page 432 Changing the setup password 432 A note about browser settings 433 The Setup Information page 434 Customizing the appearance of the pages 436 Changing the text on the main page 436 Changing the graphics 437 Providing tools and services for your patrons 438 Configuring the toolbar 438 Enabling the Bookbag 439 Setting up hold and interlibrary loan request options 440 Setting up WebCollection Plus for S
04/04 21 eBooks 467 TitlePeek button 469 Printing search results 470 Searching tools 470 Customizing the limiters 470 Repeating a search 472 Patron Empowerment 472 Accessing other applications 474 Using the Bookbag 475 Viewing events 476 Resetting the search station 476 Clearing the current search 476 Searching your library in the visual interface 477 Getting around in Visual OPAC 477 Tracing your steps 479 Using the Type In Search 480 Using the search results 481 Viewing the record 482 Using the Bookbag
04/04 Generating a Copies Added Report 506 Generating a Copies by Funding Source or Vendor Report 507 Generating a Copies With Different Call Numbers Report 511 Generating a Copies With Other Call Numbers Report 512 Generating a Copies Without Call Numbers Report 513 Printing Copy Barcode Labels 514 Generating a Copy List by Circulation Type 516 Generating a Headings Without Authorities Report 517 Generating a Lexile Report 520 Generating a Shelf List 521 Generating Spine/Pocket Labels 522 Generating a
04/04 23 Generating a Patron Name List 575 Generating a Patron Statistics Report 577 Generating a Used or Unused Patron Barcodes Report 579 Chapter 39 System reports 581 Generating your system circulation statistics 582 Generating a System Information Report 582 More information for union catalogs and members 584 Chapter 40 Extracting data 585 About extracting data 585 How to extract data 585 Using extracted data 586 Utilities 591 Chapter 41 Database maintenance utilities 591 About Utilities 591 When s
04/04 How do I back up my database? 605 Media rotation 606 Backup tips 606 Using Follett Software's Backup and Restore 607 Backing up your database 608 Restoring your database 609 Using another vendor's backup software 610 Single user sites 610 Multiuser sites 611 Restoring from backup 612 Appendices 613 Appendix A Glossary 613 Appendix B Bibliographic and authority tags 627 Bibliographic tags 627 Tags in the Easy Editor 632 Reading and interest levels and the 521 tag 634 Reading programs and the 526
04/04 25 Appendix E Using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+ 653 PHD+, PHD+ II, and PHD Laser+: the Telxon models 653 Supported barcodes 654 Connecting a PHD to your computer 655 Downloading the application 655 Using a Telxon PHD 656 The Telxon PHD main menu 657 Keys used most often 658 How to change key functions 658 PHD features 659 PHD task commands 659 Mastering barcode scanning 660 PHD scanning sounds 661 Recording remote circulations 661 Starting circulation mode and setting the date 662 Checking out an
04/04 Collecting patron barcodes 676 Collecting copy barcodes 677 Examining barcode scans 678 Reviewing or deleting individual scans 678 Viewing scan counts 678 Erasing scans 679 Troubleshooting 679 PHD Dolphin+ Quick Reference Guide 682 Important Keys 682 PHD Dolphin+ Main Menu 683 Procedures 683 Appendix G The Bar Tender 693 Setting up The Bar Tender 693 Specifying the label stock layout 693 Editing the barcode label contents 693 Printing sequential barcode labels 695 Saving sequential barcode setup
Welcome Welcome to Follett Software Company's suite of library automation solutions. This guide includes information about many of our integrated products, even though you may not have purchased all of them. Circulation Plus is a complete library collection and patron management system. It circulates your collection and tracks circulation and patron statistics, fines, holds, reserves, and your library schedule.
04/04 A PHD (Portable Handheld Device) is a portable scanner that collects, stores, and transmits data. A PHD lets you expedite your circulation, cataloging, inventory, and reporting activities. Circulation Plus and Catalog Plus currently support four PHD models: PHD+, PHD+ II, PHD Laser+, and the PHD Dolphin+.
04/04 Welcome To open the online guide, from the computer desktop, open the Follett Applications folder and double click the User's Guide icon. You can also access the Follett Applications menu from the Windows Start | Programs menu or from the Mac OS Apple menu. Getting help In addition to the information contained in this guide, all the Follett applications come with extensive help topics.
04/04 Visit our Web site Follett Software Company's home page is located at http://www.fsc.follett.com.
System Setup Chapter 1 System Setup basics Once you've completed installation, you're ready to set up the Circulation Plus/Catalog Plus applications. Check the details in the following sections before you start. Note: If you're setting up Union Catalog Plus, please see Chapter 6, Building your union." About the setup chapters The tasks in the setup chapters are presented in sequential order. You should complete all of the setup tasks in a chapter before proceeding to the next chapter.
System Setup 04/04 What you'll need To aid you in setting up Circulation Plus/Catalog Plus quickly and accurately, we recommend that you gather the following information before you start: The official name of your site as you would like it to appear on reports, and your MARC Organization Code (formerly known as holdings code), if applicable. Information about your barcode symbologies.
04/04 Chapter 1 System Setup basics Getting around in System Setup To begin setting up your software, from the computer desktop, open the Follett Applications folder and double click the System Setup icon. You can also access the Follett Applications menu from the Windows Start | Programs menu or from the Mac OS Apple menu. Important: When you launch System Setup for the first time, it creates files that are used by all the other Follett applications. This process may take several minutes.
System Setup 04/04 these options are described in Appendix C, Bibliographic and authority templates." Help menu Contains options for finding help pertaining to System Setup. From the About dialog you can see product information for the application, the current number of patrons, titles, and copies in the system, and run the System Circulation Statistics and System Information Reports (see Chapter 39, System reports").
Chapter 2 Setting up your site In this chapter, you'll do the following setup tasks: identify your library; identify your country and the first month in your statistical year; set up your barcode symbologies; protect your Follett applications with passwords; transfer the PHD application to your PHD, if you have one; and maintain events for OPAC.
System Setup 04/04 For Union Catalog Plus members: If you are a member of a union catalog, you must also enter a short site name and a MARC Organization Code. The short site name is limited to 10 characters and should be a meaningful abbreviation of the full site name. In Union Catalog Plus, the short site name appears with the copy information in Cataloging, OPAC, and WebCollection Plus for Union. If you do not have a MARC Organization Code, see the instructions below.
04/04 Chapter 2 Setting up your site 1. From the Site tabs, select the Information tab: Country where your site is located. This determines the address format. To cancel changes before saving The first month in your site's statistical year. The Follett applications use this month when generating circulation statistics and reports. Note: The Follett applications track circulation statistics automatically.
System Setup 04/04 Selecting a barcode symbology Circulation Plus and Catalog Plus can recognize the following barcode symbologies: Follett Classic symbologies Generic Codabar Codabar Mod 10 Generic Code 39 Code 39 Mod 10 Code 39 Mod 11 Code 39 Mod 43 Generic Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 A Generic LabelCode 5 Follett Software applications recognize the industry standard 14 character barcode symbologies and the Follett Classic barcode symbologies.
04/04 Chapter 2 Setting up your site How to select and define barcode symbologies 1. From the Site tabs in System Setup, select the Barcodes tab: To cancel changes before saving Note: If your site only uses Follett Classic symbologies for patrons and library materials, you're finished. Go on to the next section, How to test a barcode." 2. From the Symbology drop down lists, select the name of the symbology you are using for your patron and library item barcodes.
System Setup 04/04 3. Fill in the text boxes as appropriate for your symbology, and then test your barcodes using the instructions in the next section. When you're finished, click Save. Important: You must fill in all fields that are enabled. If you don't know the information, contact your barcode vendor. How to test a barcode 1. In the Barcodes tab, choose Test. The Test Barcode dialog appears: 2. In the Barcode text box, scan the barcode or type it, and then choose Test.
04/04 Chapter 2 Setting up your site How to change an application password 1. From the Site tabs, select the Passwords tab: To cancel changes before saving Tip: To remove password protection from your Follett applications, select the hidden text (*s), and then press DELETE. 2. In the Password column text boxes, type a password composed of up to ten alphanumeric characters. (See the following table for a list of the default passwords.
System Setup 04/04 Transferring the PHD application to a PHD Follett Software's PHD application allows your PHD to recognize your library's barcode symbologies and to work with Circulation Plus/Catalog Plus. Use the following steps to load the current version of the PHD application onto each PHD your library uses before you use it.
04/04 Chapter 2 Setting up your site How to change the PHD settings If the default port and speed aren't correct for your PHD, from the PHD tab, choose Edit under PHD Settings. The PHD Settings dialog appears: Select the port you use to attach your PHD to your computer, and then... ...select the highest speed available for that port. The PHD Dolphin+ only com municates at a speed of 9600 baud. After selecting the port and speed for your PHD, click Save.
System Setup 04/04 2. To add an event, click New. To edit an event, select the event under Event List, and click Edit. The dialog appears: To erase the note for this event 3. Add or make changes under Event Information. Type the time and date that the event you are scheduling begins and ends. Example: If the event is scheduled to begin at noon, type 12 p. If the event starts at 9:30 in the morning, type 09:30 a. Type a brief description of the event. Adding a note for each event is optional.
Chapter 3 Preparing to catalog your collection The Cataloging setup tasks you'll need to perform include the following: grouping your collection according to lending period; identifying probable call number locations in your MARC records; setting up your call number prefixes; increasing access to your collection with categories you define; defining the tag range for your brief MARC records; and making it easier to add copies to your collection.
System Setup 04/04 Circulation Plus/Catalog Plus have three default circulation types: Suggested use for default circulation types Circulation type Suggested use Regular Use the Regular circulation type for library materials that can be checked out for the standard loan period set by your library. R Non circulating eBook *NC Temporary TEM Use the *NC circulation type for electronic library materials, such as eBooks, that are not checked out through Circulation Desk.
04/04 Chapter 3 Preparing to catalog your collection circulation types. Circulation Desk automatically assigns the Temporary circulation type to temporary copies created during a checkout. You can also define any one of the Circ Types as the default. Cataloging then automatically assigns the default circulation type when adding or importing new copies to the collection that do not have a circulation type defined in the import file.
System Setup 04/04 To set up the default call number locations, follow these steps: 1. From the Cataloging tabs in System Setup, select the Call Numbers tab: To cancel changes before saving Default value is 900a. One of the five subfields must be filled in. The subfield must be valid for the tag based on current MARC 21 standards. 2. In the Tag and Subfields text boxes, type the most probable locations for the call number in your MARC bibliographic records, and then choose Save.
04/04 Chapter 3 Preparing to catalog your collection If you want to use your call number prefixes to organize your collection by subject matter, we recommend you run the Copies With Other Call Numbers Report (see page 512) and address any copies in the report (change the prefixes used by the copies or add them to the prefix list maintained in System Setup).
System Setup 04/04 How to add or edit call number prefixes 1. To add a call number prefix, choose New. The Add Call Number Prefix dialog appears. To edit the description of an existing call number prefix, select one from the list, and then choose Edit. The Edit Call Number Prefix dialog appears: Note: Once a call number prefix is saved, you can edit the description, but you cannot edit the prefix. If a prefix is incorrect, delete the call number prefix and create a new one. 2.
04/04 Chapter 3 Preparing to catalog your collection Sorting your call numbers 1. To change your call number sorting order, from the Call Num Prefixes tab, click Sorting. The Sort Call Numbers dialog appears. Note: If a partial inventory is in progress, System Setup will not allow you to change your call number sort order. The order defined in the Custom sorting group box represents the order used to organize copy lists by call number in searches and reports.
System Setup 04/04 Increasing access to your collection with categories Circulation Plus/Catalog Plus let you create categories for your collection. You assign your categories to copies in your collection in Cataloging. Categories are most commonly used for report generation and curriculum support. As an example of a report based category, let's imagine that you wanted to see a list of books you purchased using money from an Olin Foundation grant.
04/04 Chapter 3 Preparing to catalog your collection To access your categories, select Categories from the Cataloging tabs: You can have up to 2,000 categories. From this window you can add, edit, or delete a category. You cannot, however, delete or edit the Temporary category. How to add or edit categories 1. To add a new category, choose New in the Categories tab. To edit a category, select one from the list, and then choose Edit.
System Setup 04/04 How to delete categories 1. On the Categories tab, select the desired category, and then choose Delete. A warning message appears, asking if you are sure you want to delete the category. Choose Yes. You will be asked if you want to continue. Choose Yes again. The Deleting Categories progress dialog appears. When a category is deleted, the category is first removed from all of the copies to which it has been assigned.
04/04 Chapter 3 Preparing to catalog your collection To change the tag range for a brief record, follow these steps: 1. From the Cataloging tabs, select the Brief Records tab: To cancel changes before saving To reset the brief record range to the defaults: 305 through 899 The current values for the starting and ending tag numbers appear in the two text boxes. 2. In the first text box, type the first tag number for the range of tags to exclude from a brief record.
System Setup 04/04 Choose either authority or bibliographic headings as the default for the Find Headings list. Determine how the applications handle leading articles (for example, A, An, The) during searches. Enter your proxy server information for Alliance Plus Online and TitlePeek. You can set up all of these options on the Misc tab. To set up any, or all, of these options, follow these steps: 1. From the Cataloging tabs, select the Misc tab.
04/04 Chapter 3 Preparing to catalog your collection Option Description Show Authority 856 tags... Lets you display virtual" Elec. Access hyperlinks in the OPACs, WebCollection Plus, and Cataloging (OPAC Display only). These virtual hyperlinks are created from information in the 856 tags of related authority records. If you subscribe to WebPath Express (formerly 856Express), you must select this option to make the WebPath Express hyperlinks appear.
System Setup 04/04 Articles button on the Misc tab. Select the language options that meet your library's needs. Select the language(s) whose articles you wish to recognize. Note: If you change the language selection, System Setup must rebuild your keywords, which may take a long time. For a list of each language's articles, select Help. Select this to ignore all recognized leading articles when searching for a title.
04/04 Chapter 3 Preparing to catalog your collection Under Alliance Plus, enter the IP address of your proxy server again and accept the default TCP port number of 5151. If you have multiple cataloging workstations, at each one, you'll need to open System Setup and enter this information. Important: If you can currently access Alliance Plus Online and TitlePeek, you do not need to change this proxy configuration. Click Save to close the dialog box. 5.
System Setup 04/04 Notes
Chapter 4 Setting up Acquisitions The Acquisitions setup tasks you need to perform are relatively easy. Because the Acquisitions feature allows you to create book orders and track orders and funding sources, it is helpful if you have all information pertinent to particular vendors and funding sources. This information includes names, addresses, phone numbers, Tax ID numbers, and allocated funding source amounts.
System Setup 04/04 2. Enter a vendor description. 3. Enter a one to three character alphanumeric code. 4. Federal Tax ID information is available from the vendor. Note: Currently, there is no capability to delete vendors. Use the Status switch to make a vendor you no longer use Inactive. 5. Account Number is a previously established account number that you have with a specific vendor. This is not your Follett Customer Number. 6.
04/04 Chapter 4 Setting up Acquisitions Contact tab There are three extra informational tabs available for Add/Edit Vendors: Contact, Notes, and Purchases. The Contact tab is where you enter information for the person with whom you communicate. Notes tab Clicking on the Notes tab on your Vendor window opens a free form text entry box where you can type in any notes you want to store about that vendor.
System Setup 04/04 Closed Orders Total Issued or Closed orders for that vendor a total of all orders with a status of Closed the combined total of all Issued and all Closed Click Save to save your changes. Note: We recommend that you click Save at each stage when adding a vendor. If you cancel an addition at any point, none of the changes are saved. Clicking the Recompute button updates the figures in the previously mentioned fields to display any changes.
04/04 Chapter 4 Setting up Acquisitions To add funding source information, click New from the Funding Sources tab. 1. Add your funding source description (name). 2. Enter a code specific to that funding source (1 3 alphanumeric characters). 3. If you have a funding source that you are no longer using, set the Status to Inactive. (Currently, there is no capability to delete funding sources.) Amount tab The Amount tab allows you to add or update funding source monies.
System Setup 04/04 Notes tab Use the Funding Source Notes tab to capture any notes you want to store for a particular funding source. This is a free form text entry field. Note: We recommend that you click Save at each stage of a funding source add. If you decide to cancel an add at any point, none of the changes are saved. Setting the default information The Acquisitions Defaults tab is where you enter any ship to/bill to information you want to use for ordering.
04/04 Chapter 4 Setting up Acquisitions 6. If the bill to address is the same as the ship to address, check the Same As Bill To Address check box. If not, click Ship To and enter the ship to address. 7. Click Save. Note: We recommend that you click Save at each stage of a Defaults add. If you decide to cancel an update at any point, none of the changes are saved.
System Setup 04/04 Notes
Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection The setup features discussed in this chapter include ways to do the following: group your patrons for circulation purposes; make it easier to create new patrons; set up your circulation policies; set time limits for items on hold and on reserve; activate automatic fine calculation and refunds; customize your overdue, bill, and hold notices; set up your library's hours and current calendar; and set up alert sounds for your circulation desk.
System Setup 04/04 To access your patron types, select Patron Maintenance from the Setup menu in the System Setup module. If you have defined a password for Patron Maintenance, a password dialog appears. The default password for Patron Maintenance is MODPATRON. Type the password in the text box, and then choose OK. The Patron Maintenance tabs appear with the Patron Types tab open: To delete the highlighted patron type From this window you can add, edit, or delete a patron type.
04/04 Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection How to add or edit a patron type 1. To create a patron type, choose New in the Patron Types tab. To edit a patron type, select the patron type from the list, and then choose Edit. The desired dialog appears: This text appears at the top of all notices before the patron name. If this text box is empty, only the patron name appears at the top of the notice. According to this example, Dear Jane Doe:" appears on the notice.
System Setup 04/04 Making it easier to create new patrons There are a few options in System Setup that enable you to create new patrons faster and make it easier to find patrons when searching for them. To set up these options, follow these steps: 1. These prompts apply to all patron types and appear in the Edit Patron and Patron Information dialogs. Location 1 appears in the patron information box of the Circulation Desk windows.
04/04 Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection The Location and User Field prompts you enter in the Patron Defaults tab appear in the Edit Patron dialog in Patron Maintenance: Location prompts User Field prompts When you retrieve a patron in Circulation Desk, the Location 1 prompt appears in the patron information box: Patron information box Location 1 prompt, here defined as Homeroom 3.
System Setup 04/04 4. From the Default Patron Type list, select your most common patron type. Whenever you add a patron, Patron Maintenance automatically assigns this type to the new patron record. When you import patron records that don't have patron types, this patron type is assigned to those records. Empowering your patrons You can allow your patrons to log on at the search stations. You can choose to allow them to view their checkouts, fines, and holds, and to place actual holds and reserves.
04/04 Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection Holds. They cannot view any other tab or any fine notes you have created. In WebCollection Plus, the tabs appear as one page. If you choose to allow patrons to place holds and reserves, Hold/Reserve buttons appear on the OPAC's selection list and on the record display window. In WebCollection Plus, a Place Hold/Reserve button appears on the Title Information page. Clicking a button brings up the New Hold/Reserve dialog.
System Setup 04/04 Circulation policies: who can have what and for how long Now that you've completed setting up your circulation types and your patron types, you're ready to take your existing circulation policies and define them in System Setup. The circulation policies you establish in System Setup are used by Circulation Desk to automatically monitor and control checkouts, renewals, fine calculations, refunds, holds, and reserves.
04/04 Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection To access your circulation policies, from System Setup, select Setup | Circulation. If you defined a password for Circulation Setup, a password dialog appears. The default password for Circulation Setup is SOBEIT. Type the password in the text box, and then choose OK. The Circulation tabs appear with the Policies tab open: To view the policies for a patron type, select the patron type from this drop down list.
System Setup 04/04 How to limit loan periods 1. In the Policies tab, select the patron type you want to establish loan periods for from the Patron Type list. All of the circulation types appear in the Loan Periods box. Select the circulation type for which you want to define loan periods, and then choose Edit in the Loan Periods box. The Edit Loan Period dialog appears: The length of checkout (days, hours, or fixed).
04/04 Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection To keep the hold queue from building up with holds that are not retrieved or fulfilled, System Setup allows you to set time limits on them. Expiring holds After the assigned number of days, Circulation Desk expires a hold. By expiring a ready hold that has not been picked up by the patron, Circulation Desk can make the next pending hold ready, giving the next patron in the queue the opportunity to check the item out.
System Setup 04/04 A reserve has a reserve period equal to its loan period. For example, if a patron reserves an item for March 18th, and the loan period is 10 days (2 weeks) for that circulation type, the reserve period is March 18-April 1. A reserve automatically expires a day after the end of the reserve period. For more information about reserves, see A brief introduction to reserves" on page 166.
04/04 Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection Activating automatic fine calculation and refunds System Setup lets you decide whether you want to charge fines, and if so, how they're calculated. Depending on library policy, you may not want all fine options active. You can create additional fine types as needed. Unlike the default fine types of Damaged, Lost, Overdue, and Refund, user defined fine types are not associated with copy information. To set up the fines options, follow these steps: 1.
System Setup 04/04 Option Selected Cleared Include grace days in fine calculation Example: A copy is due on Monday, but not returned until Thursday. There is a two day grace period and a $0.10 fine increment for this patron type. The patron is charged $0.30 for the overdue copy. Example: A copy is due on Monday, but not returned until Thursday. There is a two day grace period and a $0.10 fine increment for this patron type. The patron is charged $0.10 for the overdue copy.
04/04 Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection To access your templates, select the Notices tab from Circulation in System Setup: To delete the highlighted template This text appears at the top of a notice when the highlighted template is assigned to a notice. This box shows you which template is used as the default when generating a notice. You can always select a different template when generating a notice.
System Setup 04/04 If you want to create a new template with completely new wording, choose New. The Add Template dialog appears. There is room for approximately 285 words (2000 characters) at the top of a notice. 2. After you type in the new wording and name the template, choose Save. 3. From the list under Template, highlight the name of the template that you want to assign as the default, and then choose Set Default. The Set Default Template dialog appears: 4.
04/04 Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection Setting your library's hours Setting up your library hours in System Setup is important because Circulation Desk uses this information when calculating due dates and fines for hourly checkouts. Be sure to define opening and closing times for each day of the week you are open, even if you are only open once a month on that day. To set up the opening and closing times for your library, follow these steps: 1.
System Setup 04/04 Circulation Desk also uses the default annual calendar to automatically create a new calendar year for you when the due date for a checkout extends into the coming year for which no calendar has been created. To set up or change your current calendar, follow these steps: 1. From the Circulation tabs, select the Calendar tab. If a calendar exists for the current year, the Calendar tab appears. Skip to step 4.
04/04 Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection When you're finished, choose Save on the Edit New Annual Calendar Defaults dialog. The Calendar tab appears: Use the scrolling buttons to move from month to month or from year to year. Use the Year forward scroll button to create a calendar for the coming year based on the default annual calendar. To edit the default annual calendar, choose Defaults and go back to step 2.
System Setup 04/04 Setting up alert sounds (and more) for your circulation desk System Setup lets you set up sounds for certain Circulation Desk events (including block conditions). From the Misc tab, you also set your default circulation type and, if you want, set an inactivity timeout period for Circulation Desk. If necessary, you can also adjust your system date from the Misc tab. Important: The sounds, today's date, and inactivity timeout options are specific to the current workstation.
04/04 Chapter 5 Preparing to circulate your collection 89 The sounds you choose will play whenever the associated event occurs. Select your most common circulation type. To clear all the Circulation Desk fields automatically after a period of inactivity, select this option. On Mac OS, to select a sound, click the popup button. To test a sound, click Play. On Windows, to select a sound, click Edit.
System Setup 04/04 Additional sounds are available on your Follett Software Installation CD. To use them at your workstation, insert the CD into the CD drive. From the CD, locate the EXTRAS\SOUNDS folder, and open the folder that matches your workstation's operating system: On Windows, drag the sounds you want from the CD to your FOLLETT\CC40\WMEDIA folder (by default located in C:\PROGRAM FILES). To set up the new sounds, follow the instructions on page 88.
Chapter 6 Building your union A union catalog can mean something very different from one district to the next. While one district might process and distribute all records from a central location, the next may rely on catalogers at each member site. No matter what your situation, this version of Follett's Union Catalog Plus with or without Follett Data Exchange Server is the most flexible district solution ever.
System Setup 04/04 Steps for building your union catalog 2. Enter your union catalog's site and cataloging information through the union catalog's System Setup. For instructions, see page 95. 3. If your union catalog will be using data exchange, the union catalog database and DX member databases must be linked to a Follett Data Exchange Server before you can add the DX members to the union catalog. For more information and instructions, see the Follett Data Exchange Guide (fscdx.pdf).
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union Participation levels Follett Data Exchange Server's seven levels of participation let you explicitly define the relationship between the union catalog and each member. The participation levels determine how information moves between the union catalog and the member. Before setting this option, you need to know how much partnering of records each member wants to have. Each level is described below.
System Setup 04/04 catalog, but it also prevents better" records from another level 5 member replacing its own records. For example, if your district were sharing electronic hyperlinks (856 tags) or curriculum objectives, these tags would not be transferred to the Level 5 members. Level 6 - In this scenario, the member sends all data to the union catalog. The union catalog only sends changes made by the district cataloger.
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union catalog. For example, the MARC specific filter for Material Types could keep a member's cataloged AV equipment from being transferred to the union catalog. A copy record is sent if it passes the copy specific filters and if its associated MARC record passes the MARC specific filters. Copy records at the union catalog are only sent to the member who owns the copy.
System Setup 04/04 Entering union catalog site information 1. To enter your union catalog's site information, from the union catalog's System Setup menu bar, select Setup. If Union is checked, select Site; if it isn't, select Union, and then select Setup | Site. If you're using a Site Setup password, a password dialog appears. Enter the Site Setup password (by default, MAKEITSO) and click OK. The Site tabs appear with the Identification tab open.
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union 2. By default, the Identification tab uses the address format for the United States. To choose a different address format, select the Information tab: Country where your union catalog is located. This will determine the address format on the Identification tab for the union catalog and all members. To cancel changes before saving After selecting your address format, click Save. 3.
System Setup 04/04 4. Through the union catalog's System Setup, you can enter events for patrons to view in the union catalog OPAC (see page 410) or with WebCollection Plus for Union (see page 450). To add or maintain events for the district, select the Events tab: To add or edit an event, see the instructions on page 44. To delete an event, select the event and click Delete. At the message, click Yes to proceed. Events entered at the union catalog cannot be deleted automatically.
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union Cataloging tabs appear with the Call Numbers tab open. Only the tabs you need are enabled: To cancel changes before saving To save you time when you add a new copy record, Cataloging looks in the locations you define here for a default call number for the copy record. This information is also used by several reports. For more information, see page 47.
System Setup 04/04 3. System Setup lets you set starting and ending tag numbers to determine if a record is brief or full from the Brief Records tab: A brief record has no information in the specified tag range. For more information, see page 54. To cancel changes before saving Resets the brief record range to the defaults: 305 through 899 After making any desired modifications, click Save. 4. A number of settings are controlled from the Misc tab.
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union From the Misc tab, you can also arrange your member databases into groups. In WebCollection Plus for Union, users can limit their searches to these groups. Important: You must set up your members before you can create groups. See Setting up your members" below for more information. To group your member databases, click the Group button on the Misc tab. From the Groups dialog, you can add, edit, or delete groups. To add a new group, click New.
System Setup 04/04 You add and maintain members through System Setup. To start System Setup, from the computer desktop, open the Follett Applications folder and double click the Union System Setup icon. The System Setup window appears (see page 33). Note: You can also access the Follett Applications menu from the Windows Start | Programs menu or from the Mac OS Apple menu. To add or modify a member, from the System Setup menu bar, select Setup | Member.
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union Entering member site information 1. To add a new non DX member, from the Members dialog (see page 102), click New. A message appears, asking if this member will participate in automated data exchange. Click No. Note: To update the setup information for a non DX member, select the member and click Edit. If you're using a Site Setup password (see page 97), a password dialog appears. Enter the Site Setup password (by default MAKEITSO) and click OK.
System Setup 04/04 2. To define the barcode symbology the member uses for their library materials, select the Barcodes tab: Select the symbology the member uses for library materials. To cancel changes before saving Only the text boxes that are appropriate for the selected symbology are enabled. To test the symbology, see page 40. Each member can use a Follett Classic symbology plus one additional 8 to 14-digit symbology for their library materials.
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union Entering member cataloging information 1. To enter the non DX member's cataloging information, from the System Setup menu bar, select Setup | Cataloging. Note: If you don't already have the member selected, from the Members dialog (see page 102), select the member and click Edit. When the member is open, select Setup | Cataloging. If you are using the Cataloging password option, a password dialog appears.
System Setup 04/04 2. If the member uses categories to group related items in their collection, select the Categories tab: To add or edit categories, see page 53. Deletes the selected category Each member can have up to 2,000 categories. From this tab you can add, edit, or delete categories for the member. For more information about categories, see page 52. Note: You cannot delete or edit the Temporary category.
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union Connection information for the Follett Data Exchange Server(s) supporting the union catalog's database and each member's database, including IP addresses and any user IDs or passwords that may be required. Each member's level of participation (see page 93). Any material types, categories, call number prefixes, or circulation types the member wants to exclude from the union catalog database (see page 94).
System Setup 04/04 3. If more than one member database is supported by the Data Exchange Server you specified in step 2, a list of the supported member databases appears: This list shows all the member databases linked to this Follett Data Exchange Server. Choose the member you want to add to the union catalog and click Select. The Data Exchange Properties dialog for the selected member appears.
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union 1. To define the relationship between the member and the union catalog, select one of the options on the Level of Participation tab. This selection determines what information moves between the member and union catalog databases: 2.
System Setup 04/04 Note: Since filter rules prevent records from being sent to the union catalog, reports run at the union catalog may not exactly reflect the member's collection. 3. From the Error Logging tab, you specify the types of errors that should be logged and where to log them. Where you choose to log the errors depends on the availability and location of your district's technical personnel: If communications fail, any pending transactions will simply wait until communications resume.
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union 4. From the Connection tab, you specify the member's connection type: Currently, a full time connection to the union catalog (i.e., a LAN or a WAN) is the only supported connection type. 5. To save your settings, click Save. A message appears, asking if you want to reload the data from the member. If you've just added the member, click Yes.
System Setup 04/04 Updating DX member information At some point, you may need or want to update a DX member's information: To change a member's participation level or filtering rules, from the Members dialog (see page 102), select the member and click Connect. The member's Data Exchange Properties dialog appears. See Setting the Data Exchange rules," starting on page 108.
04/04 Chapter 6 Building your union non DX members' full records before importing any brief records. You also need a general idea of the quality of each member's MARC records and attempt to import the highest quality records first: 1. Have your non DX members export all their full records and then export all their brief records. Make certain they include copies with both and indicate which export file is which. 2.
System Setup 04/04 Notes
Circulation Desk Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics The basic features of Circulation Desk discussed in this chapter include the following: starting Circulation Desk; limiting access for Circulation Desk workstations; configuring your Receipt Printer (Transaction Tracker); displaying patron pictures; basic Circulation Desk transactions typing or scanning barcodes, selecting patrons or copies with the Find Patron and Find Title buttons; handling block conditions; viewing and printing patron information
Circulation Desk 04/04 Windows: To accept the date and time stated in the message, click No. To change the system date or time, click Yes and the Windows Date/Time Properties dialog appears. After you make your changes, the date/time confirmation message displays the new settings. You can change the system date/time again, if necessary. Otherwise, choose No to continue. Mac OS: To accept the date and time stated in the message, click OK.
04/04 Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics successful checkout and describes the basic elements of many of the Circulation Desk windows: Menu bar Find Patron and Find Title buttons Circulation Desk toolbar (the depressed button, which is darker, indicates the active window) To get help on the current window The Special Due Date is active if a date appears here. The barcode you type or scan appears here.
Circulation Desk 04/04 menu on the menu bar. You can also switch between windows by using the key combinations on the Circulation menu. When you switch windows, Circulation Desk retains the current patron. Because it does so, if you discover during a renewal that the patron owes a fine, you can switch to the Fines window and record a payment without scanning or entering the patron barcode again. Pressing ESC clears the current patron.
04/04 Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics 2. Once you enter the password, the Limit Circulation Desk Access dialog appears: Starts the Limited Access mode. Once access has been limited, the Circulation Desk password will be required to restore full access. Select one or both circulation operations. If neither is selected, a message appears. Check these boxes when you want patrons to be able to search for patrons or titles.
Circulation Desk 04/04 Important: You cannot continue with this process until the correct password is entered. 2. Once you enter the password, full access to Circulation Desk is restored. Receipt Printer (Transaction Tracker) setup and printing If your library prints receipts for patrons, you can customize the information printed on the receipts. These options are only available if you have purchased and installed the Transaction Tracker for Circulation Plus.
04/04 Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics Receipts can be printed from several areas of the Circulation Desk, including Check Out, Holds/Reserves, Fines, and Lost Copies. Each receipt will be printed based on the setup defined.
Circulation Desk 04/04 Showing and hiding patron pictures If your library has patron pictures for patron records, you will have the option to show those pictures. See also: For information on attaching pictures to patron records, see page 189. From the Circulation Desk File menu, choose Show Patron Picture. The patron's picture appears in the lower right corner of the Circulation Desk. The Patron Picture window can be moved to a different location on the desktop.
04/04 Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics Typing or scanning barcodes When you successfully scan a barcode, it immediately appears in the Type or Scan a Barcode text box. Note: If you type your barcodes and are using a Follett Classic barcode symbology for both patrons and copies, we recommend that you type the preceding P" or T" (the type identifier). If you do not, there could be confusion between patron and library material barcodes.
Circulation Desk 04/04 From the Circulation Desk window, select the Find Patron button. The Find Patron dialog appears: From the Whose drop down list, select the type of search you want to perform. If searching by name, type the name as Last, First. If searching by Name sounds like, type in the closest phonetic equivalent of the patron's last name. If you have trouble finding a patron one way, try another type of search.
04/04 Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics From the Circulation Desk window, select the Find Title button. The Find Title dialog appears: From the Whose list, select the type of search you want to perform. If you have trouble finding a title one way, try another type of search. Type the search string in the text box and choose Find. To initiate the search You can use the up and down arrow keys to navigate through the list of titles and copies.
Circulation Desk 04/04 Important messages for patrons Once a patron is selected by scanning, typing, or using the Find Patron dialog, if an important message exists for the patron, this message is displayed. An important message must be created for the patron in Patron Maintenance or from the Edit Patron button in Circulation Desk (see How to add or edit an important message or a note," page 189). To close the Important Message and return to the Circulation Desk window, click OK.
04/04 Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics Circulation Desk barcode scanning sounds Circulation Desk sound event Cause for sound Successful Barcode Entry Each time you scan a valid barcode, and successfully retrieve the patron or copy, you hear this sound. If you are scanning barcodes, this sound plays in addition to the beep from the scanner. Block Condition If you try to perform a transaction that violates the circulation policies you define in System Setup, you hear this sound.
Circulation Desk 04/04 Transaction block conditions Message Cause Checkout limit reached The patron is attempting to exceed the maximum number of copies allowed to this patron type. The Checkout limit may be set to 0". You can change it in System Setup. Checkout limit reached for this circ type. Proceeding with the transaction will override the max imum limit for ALL circ types.
04/04 Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics If you prefer greater control over the ability to override block conditions, then you may want to define the Circulation Desk Override password. Once you have defined the Circulation Desk Override password in System Setup, you must enter the password to complete the transaction. Note: You cannot override the block condition,
(barcode: . . . ) is a Non circulating copy.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-130.html>PAGE 130</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Viewing and printing patron information You can view the following information about a patron from either Circulation Desk or Patron Maintenance: current checkouts; transaction statistics including current and accumulated counts; personal information including addresses, and location and user fields; current and pending fines; current holds and reserves; and any patron note or important message that has been entered for the patron.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-131.html>PAGE 131</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics Each tab shows detailed information about the patron: The Stats tab shows the current transaction counts, the circulation limits defined in System Setup, and some cumulative circulation statistics. This column shows the limits defined for patrons of this patron type. These limits are defined in the Policies tab in System Setup. Click to view or print circulation statistics for the selected patron.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-132.html>PAGE 132</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Note: If the Collect Patron Transaction Histories check box in System Setup is unchecked and you have removed patron history in Utilities, no statistical information will be displayed on the Stats tab. To take action on any checkouts, fines, holds, or reserves, switch to the appropriate Circulation Desk window. To print patron information from one of the tabs, choose Print on the Patron Information dialog.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-133.html>PAGE 133</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics To view the number of circulation and holds transactions recorded for the selected patron during a given time period, select the Details button on the Stats tab. The Patron Circulation Statistics dialog appears: List includes hours, days, months, and years. Enter a number from 1 to 90. Updates the current data with the patron's circulation statistics for the selected period. Prints the patron's circulation statistics.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-134.html>PAGE 134</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Viewing the current status of a copy From the Copy Status window you can retrieve the status of any copy in your collection by scanning its barcode or by selecting it using the Find Title button. This feature enables you to find out quickly when a copy is due. The Copy Status window appears as follows: You can access and manage the hold queue from the Copy Status window by choosing the Holds/Reserves button in the Copy Status window.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-135.html>PAGE 135</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 7 Circulation Desk basics To view the recent checkouts of a copy, choose Checkouts in the Copy Status window. The Checkouts dialog appears: To view circulation and hold statistics for the selected copy, choose Copy Details. To view circulation and hold statistics for the title, choose Title Details. List includes hours, days, months, and years. Updates the current data with the system's circulation statistics for the selected period.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-136.html>PAGE 136</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Troubleshooting This table lists some problems that may occur while using Circulation Desk: Basic troubleshooting for Circulation Desk Problem Suggestion Copy barcode won't scan Patron barcode won't scan If a barcode won't scan properly, try cleaning your scanner head, then consult the documentation that came with your scanner, or see the Appendix.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-137.html>PAGE 137</a></h6><p>Chapter 8 Checking out items This chapter provides instructions for checking out copies, adding or editing patrons during a checkout, adding titles during a checkout, handling non circulating items, showing due dates, and setting special due dates for checkouts and renewals. Important: It is very important to set up your calendar in System Setup for the coming year before you check out items in Circulation Desk that will be due after year's end.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-138.html>PAGE 138</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 How to check out a copy The basic checkout procedure involves entering two barcodes: the patron barcode and the copy barcode: Type or scan the patron barcode. If the patron barcode is missing or damaged, use the Find Patron button. When Circulation Desk retrieves the patron successfully, the Important Message dialog displays (if there is a message) and brief patron information appears in the patron information box.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-139.html>PAGE 139</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 8 Checking out items If the loan period for the copy is defined as zero, a message appears stating that the copy is non circulating. For more information about non circulating copies, see Handling non circulating copies" on page 141. If you try to check out or renew a copy that has a pending or ready hold or reserve on it for another patron, a message appears asking you to confirm this action.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-140.html>PAGE 140</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 permanent record, Circulation Desk assigns a material type of Book (Monograph) to all titles created during a checkout. A temporary title record is for titles that change frequently or have short circulation periods. For example, you might use temporary title records to circulate paperbacks and unbound magazines. Note, however, that you cannot change temporary records to permanent records later.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-141.html>PAGE 141</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 8 Checking out items 1. In the Type or Scan a Barcode text box, type or scan an unassigned barcode. If your patron and copy barcodes are distinct, a message appears asking you if you want to add a title. If Circulation Desk cannot distinguish your patron from your copy barcodes, a message box appears, giving you the option of creating a patron or a title record. In either case, if you choose to add a title, the Add Title dialog appears: To save the MARC bibliographic and copy record.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-142.html>PAGE 142</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 if you want to check out the non circulating copy. If you choose Yes, the Non Circulating Due Date dialog appears: To proceed with the checkout Enter the date and time on which you want the non circulating item to return. The date and time default to the current date and time. If you proceed with the checkout, the non circulating due date you defined appears in the title information box on the Check Out window as the due date of the copy.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-143.html>PAGE 143</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 8 Checking out items From the Circulation menu, select the Show Date Window option. The Date Window displays: Select the patron type from list. Non-circulating eBooks cannot be checked out. These dates are based on the corresponding loan policies you set up for the selected patron type. Note: If a Ceiling Date is being used, the Grace Date is based on the Ceiling Date. Special Due Dates do not affect the Due Dates shown for a given Circulation Type.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-144.html>PAGE 144</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Important: If you try to save a special due date that has already passed, an alert box appears giving you the option of correcting it. To turn off the special due date, clear the Use Special Due Date check box, and choose Save.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-145.html>PAGE 145</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 8 Checking out items Check Out error messages (Cont.) Message Cause There are pending holds on . . . Are you sure you want to check it out to . . . instead? The copy the patron is renewing could satisfy a pending hold. If you continue with the renewal, the hold remains pending and could possibly expire before it becomes ready. If you do not continue, check the copy in to ready the hold. There is no fixed due date defined for patron type . . .</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-146.html>PAGE 146</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-147.html>PAGE 147</a></h6><p>Chapter 9 Renewing items In Circulation Desk, you can renew some or all of a patron's checkouts from the Check Out window. You can also renew stacks of copies quickly from the Renewals window, even if they're checked out to different patrons. This chapter provides instructions for both renewal procedures. Renewing all (or some) of a patron's checkouts The most common way to renew copies is from the Check Out window.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-148.html>PAGE 148</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 When you choose Renew, the Renew dialog appears: To renew all or just the selected copies Choose Renew Selected Copies if only renewing some copies. If Overdue or Renewal Limit icons appear here, block conditions appear if you try to renew these copies. If the Hold Pending icon appears here, a message appears asking you to confirm that you want to renew this checkout. List of patron's current checkouts. If only renewing some copies, highlight them on this list.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-149.html>PAGE 149</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 9 Renewing items How to renew a single copy or stack of copies If a patron, such as a teacher, brings a stack of items to the circulation desk and wants to renew them, you can renew them quickly without retrieving the patron information for each item. To do this, switch to the Renewals window and scan the copy barcode: Scan or type the copy barcode here. Brief copy information appears in the title information box. Check to see if a special due date is in effect before renewing.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-150.html>PAGE 150</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Troubleshooting The following table lists some messages that might appear while renewing copies from the Renewals window. For other messages that appear while renewing copies, see Troubleshooting at the end of Chapter 8, Checking out items." Renewal error messages Message Cause This copy is at the bindery and cannot be renewed. Please check it in. According to Circulation Desk, the patron is attempting to re new a copy that is at the bindery.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-151.html>PAGE 151</a></h6><p>Chapter 10 Checking in items This chapter provides instructions for checking in copies and handling items on hold or on reserve. How to check in a copy Circulation Desk prompts you for the copy barcode at the start of a checkin: When you scan or type the copy barcode, it appears here. If the copy's barcode is missing or damaged, try searching for the copy by title. For information about the Find Title dialog, see page 125.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-152.html>PAGE 152</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 If you want to be alerted by sound when a copy that was checked in readies a hold or reserve, creates a fine, represents In-Library Usage, has a non-standard copy status, or was a temporary item, see the section on setting up alert sounds on page 88. See also: For information about recording a fine payment, see Chapter 11, Dealing with fines and lost copies.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-153.html>PAGE 153</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 10 Checking in items Message Cause The copy cannot be checked in. It has not been checked out. This message might appear if you are checking in copies that had not been checked out. You do not need to check these copies in before reshelving them. Note: You do not receive this message if Record In Library Usage check box is selected. Fine threshold reached.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-154.html>PAGE 154</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Message Cause This copy was loaned out. Please update your records. The copy being checked in was loaned out to another library. Since you probably keep track of copies you loan to other libraries, you should update your paperwork before you check in these copies. The copy status changes from Loaned Out to Available. This copy was lost. The copy being checked in was reported lost by a patron. The patron was probably charged a lost copy fine.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-155.html>PAGE 155</a></h6><p>Chapter 11 Dealing with fines and lost copies This chapter contains a brief explanation of the kinds of fines you can create in Circulation Desk and instructions for the following: recording payment for a single fine or for the total current fine balance; creating fines for damaged and overdue copies; editing fines; giving refunds; marking checked out copies lost and generating a fine for a lost copy.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-156.html>PAGE 156</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 The following shows the Fines window and describes its features: Scan or type the patron barcode. An important message may appear. See Important mes sages for patrons" on page 126. If enabled, the patron's picture displays. To print a receipt for the patron, choose Print Receipt. See Receipt Printer (Transaction Tracker) setup and printing" on page 120 for more information. Brief patron information appears in the patron information box.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-157.html>PAGE 157</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 11 Dealing with fines and lost copies For more information on printing fine receipts, see the following sections. See also: For an example of a refund receipt, see page 161. For information about printing a patron's current fines, see page 130. Recording payment against the fine balance Tip: Since Circulation Desk doesn't deduct refunds from the total fine amount, apply any refunds to the individual fines before accepting payment on the remaining balance.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-158.html>PAGE 158</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Recording payment for a single fine To record payment for a single fine, select the fine the patron wants to pay from the list of fines in the Fines window and choose Pay. The Pay Fine dialog appears: To print a receipt for the paid fine, select this option. When you click Save, the receipt prints at this workstation's default printer. Type the amount of payment here. Do not enter an amount greater than the Amt Due. Type the amount you want to waive, if any, here.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-159.html>PAGE 159</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 11 Dealing with fines and lost copies To create fines manually, choose New from the Fines window. The New Fine dialog appears: To print a receipt for the fine, select this option. When you click Save, the receipt prints at this workstation's default printer. Select the type of fine you want to create. Choose from the list. Type the amount you want to charge here. Scan or type the barcode of the copy for which you want to create the fine.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-160.html>PAGE 160</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Editing fines After creating a fine, you can change the amount of the fine, the amount paid, or the amount waived. To edit a fine, highlight the fine you want to edit from the list of fines in the Fines window and choose Edit. The Edit Fine dialog appears: To print a receipt for the fine, select this option. When you click Save, the receipt prints at this workstation's default printer. Type the corrected amounts in the Amount, Paid, or Waived text boxes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-161.html>PAGE 161</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 11 Dealing with fines and lost copies Giving refunds Circulation Desk only generates refunds in two situations: If a patron has reported a lost copy and has made payment on the lost copy fine, Circulation Desk generates a refund equaling the amount paid if the copy is checked in.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-162.html>PAGE 162</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 therefore, do not show up as missing on an inventory report. For more information about copy status and inventory status, see Overview of an Inventory" on page 209. If you mark a patron's checkout Lost, and the copy is checked in later, Circulation Desk automatically generates a refund for the amount paid for the lost copy fine. A message appears when the copy is checked in alerting you that Circulation Desk is generating a refund for a lost copy.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-163.html>PAGE 163</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 11 Dealing with fines and lost copies Charging a fine for the lost copy While marking a copy lost, if you choose to create a fine for a lost copy, the New Fine dialog appears: To print a receipt for the fine, select this option. When you click Save, the receipt prints at this workstation's default printer. The amount in the Amount text box normally comes from the copy information or the Fine Limit. See the following note for more information.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-164.html>PAGE 164</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Troubleshooting If you want to disable the automatic fine calculation, or change the way fines are calculated, see Activating automatic fine calculation and refunds" on page 81.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-165.html>PAGE 165</a></h6><p>Chapter 12 Managing holds This chapter contains instructions for placing holds and reserves, managing and editing holds and reserves, and interpreting the Daily Holds Processing exception report. Circulation Desk allows you to place holds and reserves for patrons; OPAC allows patrons to place holds and reserves for themselves. See also: For more information on allowing patrons to place their own holds and reserves, see page 74 to set up Patron Empowerment and page 472 to use it.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-166.html>PAGE 166</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 becomes available. Circulation Desk allows you to extend the expiration date of a hold at any time. A brief introduction to reserves Circulation Desk allows you to place a reserve for a patron. A reserve is basically a hold for a specific copy for a specific future date. The following scenarios provide examples for the use of a reserve: A student wants to have a certain book for a class presentation two weeks from now.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-167.html>PAGE 167</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 12 Managing holds reserved item, and the normal loan period would overlap the reserve period, Circulation Desk automatically shortens the loan period so that the item is due the day before the processing date. In addition, Circulation Desk does not allow another patron to place a reserve on the same item for a date that is within the existing reserve period. These measures help to ensure that the reserving patron receives their copy when needed.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-168.html>PAGE 168</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 You can view the status of a hold or reserve from the Holds/Reserves window or the Hold Queue. The queue lists all the patrons waiting to receive a copy of an item. You can get to the Hold Queue from either the Holds/Reserves window or the Copy Status window (see page 134) by clicking Holds/Reserves. Placing a hold or reserve for a patron To place a hold or reserve for a patron, follow these steps: 1. In the Holds/Reserves window, click New.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-169.html>PAGE 169</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 12 Managing holds 5. To place a hold on a specific copy or to reserve it for a future date, click the Select button under Specific Copy. The Select Copy dialog appears. Highlight the desired copy, and click Select. Highlight the desired copy and click Select. 6. To create the hold or reserve, click Save. A message appears informing you of the hold or reserve's expiration date. For a hold, the message includes its position in the queue. A reserve is always at the top of the queue.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-170.html>PAGE 170</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 To extend the expiration date of a hold, from the Holds/Reserves window (see page 167), highlight the hold and click View/Edit. The Edit Hold dialog appears: Enter the new expiration date, and click Save. Note: If the hold expired and copies are now available, a message appears asking you to confirm that you want to revive the hold. The priority helps control placement of a hold in the hold queue.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-171.html>PAGE 171</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 12 Managing holds holds second, and pending holds last. Holds with the same status are sorted in ascending order according to priority and the date placed. The lower the priority value, the higher the hold's position is in the queue. To change the priority of a patron's hold, highlight the hold that you want to edit and click View/Edit. The Edit Hold dialog appears: Type the new priority value, and click Save. A message appears informing you of the hold's new position in the queue.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-172.html>PAGE 172</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 The Daily Holds Processing exception report will help you maintain your ready hold shelf and keep patrons informed of the status of their holds. Note: If you are unfamiliar with the terms Ready," Pending," and Expired," please refer to the first sections in this chapter, starting on page 165.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-173.html>PAGE 173</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 12 Managing holds The exception report is divided into sections that show what action Circulation Desk has taken on the holds and reserves. The following table describes the cause of each message and gives recommended actions: Follow up for the Daily Holds Processing exception report Holds processing section Cause Illegal Holds Deleted Circulation Desk rarely encounters illegal hold situations.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-174.html>PAGE 174</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Troubleshooting The following table lists messages that might appear while creating, editing, deleting, or managing your holds and reserves: Hold and reserve error messages Message Cause All copies are lost, missing, or are Non-circulating eBooks a hold cannot be placed. There are no holdable copies available. For a copy to be holdable, the copy status must be Available, Checked out, At The Bindery, Loaned out, or On Hold.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-175.html>PAGE 175</a></h6><p>Chapter 13 Circulating items with a PHD This chapter starts with a brief explanation of why you would want to use a PHD to circulate your collection and some suggestions regarding what to do before you start. After that you'll find instructions for processing your remote circulation data and for interpreting the resulting exception report.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-176.html>PAGE 176</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Before recording transactions with a PHD Because your PHD does not store information about your patrons, if you use it to circulate your collection, transactions that would normally produce block conditions continue as if the patron had violated none of your loan policies.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-177.html>PAGE 177</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 13 Circulating items with a PHD To make sure that the scans you collect with your PHD are processed the way you want, follow these steps: 1. From the toolbar in the Circulation Desk window, select Remote Circ. The Remote Circulation window appears: Records the use of items that weren't checked out These instructions change based on the PHD you choose. Select the PHD model you're using. To change the transfer settings, see step 6. 2.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-178.html>PAGE 178</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 To create a temporary title record and copy for each copy not found in the database during processing, choose Create a temporary copy. Note: All temporary title records created during remote circulation data processing have the title: Temporary created by Remote Circ on MM/DD/YYYY," where the date is the date on which you transfer the data from your PHD to a workstation.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-179.html>PAGE 179</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 13 Circulating items with a PHD Interpreting the Remote Circulation Processing exception report If there were any exceptions encountered during processing, the Remote Circulation Processing exception report appears in the report viewer. The following shows how the beginning of this exception report might appear: Remote Circulation Processing 10/13/2000 @ 3:20pm Patron information always appears above transac tion information.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-180.html>PAGE 180</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Message Cause Ceiling date used (MM/DD/YY). The ceiling date was used to determine the due date for this copy. Circulation type checkout limit reached. The patron checked out an item when their number of checkouts for a specific Circ Type is already at the maximum limit set in System Setup. Copy barcode is invalid. The symbology of the copy barcode you scanned does not match the symbology defined for your library materials in System Setup.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-181.html>PAGE 181</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 13 Circulating items with a PHD Message Cause This copy was on hold for . . . The hold status has been changed to pending" and will become ready" again at a lat er date. The copy that was checked out was a pending hold for another patron. You might want to extend the expiration date of the hold to make sure that it does not expire before becoming ready. See also: For more information about extending holds, see Extending the life of a hold" on page 169. This copy was overdue.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-182.html>PAGE 182</a></h6><p>Circulation Desk 04/04 Message Cause This patron is restricted. This patron has a restricted status. This usually indicates that you do not want to check out or renew any copies to this patron. To prevent this message from appearing, print out a list of restricted patrons from Reports before circulating with your PHD. Use this list to monitor transactions. See also: For more information about printing patron lists, see Generating a Patron Name List" on page 575. This patron's card has expired.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-183.html>PAGE 183</a></h6><p>Patrons Chapter 14 Patron Maintenance basics This chapter contains general information and instructions for using Patron Maintenance, including searching for patron records. See also: For information about how to prepare for Patron Maintenance by setting the default patron type or changing the prompts in user defined fields, see Making it easier to create new patrons" on page 72.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-184.html>PAGE 184</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 the password and click OK. The Patron Maintenance default password is MODPATRON. The Patron Maintenance main window appears: Menu bar From the Patron Maintenance main window, you can choose to search for a record, create a record, edit or delete existing records once they are found, or access the menu bar.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-185.html>PAGE 185</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 14 Patron Maintenance basics Patron search options Button Description Search using the patron's last name. Example: Schmidt, Betty or Schmidt When you're not sure of the spelling, start the search with a name that sounds like the patron's last name. Type at least the first two letters for a truncated search. Example: To search for a patron named Nowles, type No or Noles Search using the patron's barcode.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-186.html>PAGE 186</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 and then click Search. Patron Maintenance displays a list of patrons in the Patron Maintenance main window, with the patron's name highlighted: Use the arrow keys to move up or down the list. Use the HOME key to go to the top of the list, or the END key to go to the bottom.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-187.html>PAGE 187</a></h6><p>Chapter 15 Maintaining individual patron records This chapter contains general information about maintaining individual patron records and specific instructions for the following maintenance tasks: adding and editing a patron record; adding, editing, and deleting addresses; adding and editing an important message or a note; adding, replacing, and removing patron pictures; and deleting individual patron records.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-188.html>PAGE 188</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 How to add, edit, and delete addresses Patrons can have up to two addresses in their records. You can add addresses when you are creating a patron record or later when you are editing the record. When there is more than one address, the address identified as the patron's primary address will be used for patron notices. You can also edit the address or delete one or both of the addresses. 1. By default, the first address entered is the primary address.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-189.html>PAGE 189</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 15 Maintaining individual patron records How to add or edit an important message or a note To display miscellaneous information about a patron when his or her record is accessed, Patron Maintenance lets you attach important messages and notes to patron records. An important message appears automatically when anyone accesses the patron's record in Circulation Desk and Patron Maintenance (see Important messages for patrons," page 126).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-190.html>PAGE 190</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 Patron picture format requirements Picture Property Valid specifications Windows file formats JPEG File Interchange Format (*.jpg), Windows Bitmap (*.bmp), Tagged Image File Format (*.tif), and PC Paintbrush (*.pcx). Mac file formats Windows (.bmp), Graphics Interchange (.gif), JPEG/JFIF compliant (.jif, .jpg, .jpeg), MacPaint painting (.mac), Photoshop (R) file (.psd), PICT (.pct), Portable Network Graphics (.png), QuickDraw GX image, Quick Time image file (.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-191.html>PAGE 191</a></h6><p>Chapter 16 Maintaining patron records in batches This chapter provides general information about globally editing patron records. It also provides instructions for making sequential and global updates, making updates using a PHD, making global deletes, and deleting patrons with a PHD. The chapter also contains explanations for the exception reports that may result when the system processes the data stored in a PHD.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-192.html>PAGE 192</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 1. On the Patron Maintenance main window, open the Edit menu and select Global Update. The Global Update dialog appears. 2. From the Whose and Is lists, select the name and contents of the patron field that you want to use as a basis for the change. This selection determines which records will be updated. (The prompt names of the location and user fields are based on what you entered in System Setup.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-193.html>PAGE 193</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 16 Maintaining patron records in batches Scan or type the patron's barcode number after making the choices below. Selecting Change displays and activates these To list boxes. Do Not Change is the default. If you select Change, a list of possible values for that field appears. These prompts depend on the entry made in System Setup. Clear deletes any data in the field. 3. Click in the Barcode text box. Scan or type a patron's barcode number, and then select Update.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-194.html>PAGE 194</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 1. With your PHD, scan the barcodes of the patrons you want to update. For instructions on collecting patron scans with the PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+, see Collecting inventory, copy, or patron data" on page 663. To collect patron scans with a PHD Dolphin+, see page 676. When you finish collecting scans, connect your PHD to your computer.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-195.html>PAGE 195</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 16 Maintaining patron records in batches When you click Update, a confirmation message appears. To continue, click Yes. Once the data transfer process begins, a progress dialog appears. If any problems occurred during the patron update process, an exception report is generated. Carefully check the report. It is located in the Exception Reports folder within your Follett folder. Globally deleting patrons With Global Delete, you can delete multiple patron records at one time.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-196.html>PAGE 196</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 2. After you make your selections, click Delete. A confirmation message appears. Click OK. While deleting the selected patrons, Patron Maintenance displays a progress dialog. When the delete process ends, Patron Maintenance produces an exception report that lists, for each patron meeting the criteria, the patron name, barcode number, ID number, and whether the patron was deleted or skipped (and the reason).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-197.html>PAGE 197</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 16 Maintaining patron records in batches 2. From the Patron Maintenance main window, select Edit | Delete Patrons via PHD. The following dialog appears: If you want to keep patrons that have active checkouts, holds, fines, or refunds due, clear this option. Select the PHD model you're using. To change the transfer set tings, click Edit. These instructions change based on the PHD you choose.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-198.html>PAGE 198</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 Interpreting the exception report The following table lists messages that may be generated when the system checks your patron barcodes during the processing of your PHD data: Patron Maintenance exception messages Exception message Meaning Barcode <patron barcode> not found Patron barcode transferred from your PHD for processing cannot be found in system database. Invalid barcode Patron barcode does not follow the symbology defined in Barcode Setup for patrons.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-199.html>PAGE 199</a></h6><p>Chapter 17 Importing patron information This chapter contains general information about importing patron records and patron pictures, formatting information, getting ready to import, importing patron records, importing patron pictures, and interpreting the exception report. About importing patron records If your administration sends you disks containing new patron records, you can decrease the amount of time required for annual updating.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-200.html>PAGE 200</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 Header portion of the file The first line in the import file must be a header line. The third field, Patron file format version, must contain 4.00 if the file is in the 31 field format described in Patron record portion of the file." Do not enter the current application version that you are running. Although it is not required that the other header fields contain data, each field, listed in the following table, must exist in the header.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-201.html>PAGE 201</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 17 Importing patron information Patron fields (Cont.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-202.html>PAGE 202</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 The patron in the following example is Patty Sellers, whose record data is the same as that shown in the above table. In the export file, this record would appear as a single line terminated by a hard return. Please note that there are no trailing spaces at the end of the record. P52",241661234",Sellers",Patty",Jo",20050630,2005,19880214,F",S",A",Johnson",Gymnasium",4th Period",ESL", 19 Ridge St",Route 3",Sycamore",Illinois",60987",pjo@aol.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-203.html>PAGE 203</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 17 Importing patron information Merge, or Replace, that Patron Maintenance executes when a duplicate record is found. Select barcode or ID as specified in System Setup for identifying your patrons. Barcode is the default. Typically used when adding new patron records. Skips incoming records if they exist in database. Typically used when updating existing records. All non blank fields from the incoming record replace the corresponding fields in the existing record. Other fields remain as is.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-204.html>PAGE 204</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 Patron Maintenance errors during a patron import (Cont.) Error message Meaning Graduation year field in valid: Defaulted to blank. All blank and invalid dates are set to (blank). Graduation year field two digit year adjusted to <four digit year>. If only 2 digits are provided for the graduation year, it is converted to a 4 digit date: 19 is prefixed to 38-99, 20 is prefixed to 00-37. The import record does not contain the proper number of fields.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-205.html>PAGE 205</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 17 Importing patron information 1. On the Patron Maintenance main window, select File | Import Patron Pictures from the menu. The Import Patron Pictures dialog appears. Select the locations of the import file and the patron photos you want to import, and choose how the system should handle duplicates. Patron Maintenance automatically checks your CC40\TEMP folder for an import file from Lifetouch National School Studios. If found, the path to the file appears in the Import File text box.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-206.html>PAGE 206</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 Interpreting the exception report Any errors encountered during the import patron pictures process are entered into an exception report. This table lists the possible errors and their meanings: Patron Maintenance errors during a patron picture import Error message Meaning Error occurred finding Patron <barcode id>. Could not find patron barcode/ID. Verify that the patron's record exists and the barcode is correct in Patron Maintenance.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-207.html>PAGE 207</a></h6><p>Chapter 18 Exporting patron records This chapter contains general information about exporting patron records, discusses what you'll need to get ready, and provides instructions on how to export patron records. About exporting patron records The Export Patrons option allows you to clean up" your patron database at the end of a school year, send patron records to another school within a district, or allow district wide access to patron records.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-208.html>PAGE 208</a></h6><p>Patrons 04/04 How to export patron records On the Patron Maintenance main window, select File | Export Patrons. In the dialog, select the criteria you want to use to define your export records and check the destination path displayed in the File Name text box. What appears in your Select By and Patron Types drop down lists will depend on what you defined in System Setup. Identify how you want to select patron records to export.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-209.html>PAGE 209</a></h6><p>Inventory Chapter 19 Inventory basics After circulating your collection, you may notice that some items just aren't where they're supposed to be. Inventorying your collection lets you know exactly what you have and what is missing or just misshelved. Once you know what's in your collection, you'll also be in a better position to make acquisition decisions. With Follett Software's Inventory application, you can choose to take stock of your entire collection or inspect one section at a time.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-210.html>PAGE 210</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 Preparing for inventory Before you start inventory, there are a few steps you can take to help things run smoothly: Create a schedule. At some point during the year, you'll probably want to inventory your entire collection. Do you want to run a full inventory or run a series of partial inventories? Please note that each partial inventory must be finalized before beginning the next one. Perhaps you just want to take a look at the status of your high traffic areas.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-211.html>PAGE 211</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 19 Inventory basics The following table shows the relationship between an item's copy status and its beginning inventory status: Copy status Beginning inventory status Available Unmarked Items with a copy status of Available should theoretically be somewhere on your library's shelves and need to be accounted for during your inventory. Inventory initially sets the inventory status of these items to Unmarked.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-212.html>PAGE 212</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 If you add an item to your collection at any time, during or outside an inventory, Cataloging automatically assigns an inventory status of Marked. After inventory Before finalizing an inventory, we recommend that you print an Inventory List by Call Number for the Unmarked items in your collection (see page 558). If you missed a section or shelf or discover a cart full of items that were not reshelved, they're still Unmarked.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-213.html>PAGE 213</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 19 Inventory basics Inventory Checklist As you take inventory of your collection, use this checklist to keep track of your progress. You may copy this page (front and back) for future use. For detailed information about these ten steps, please consult the Inventory, Reports, and Backup and Restore chapters and the PHD appendices in the User's Guide.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-214.html>PAGE 214</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 Steps for inventory 7. Enter all the Unmarked copies in your collection into Inventory. Use the schedule you created in step 1 as a guide. You can use any combination of the following inventory methods: Scan copies directly into the Inventory main window. Scan copies using a PHD. Use a portable computer to collect inventory scans. Remember to: Save the inventory file (scans) when prompted. Use a different file name each time.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-215.html>PAGE 215</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 19 Inventory basics Starting and getting around in Inventory From the computer desktop, open the Follett Applications folder and double click the Inventory icon. Note: You can also access the Follett Applications menu from the Windows Start | Programs menu or from the Mac OS Apple menu. If you are using the password option for Circulation Desk from System Setup's Site setup (see page 41), a password dialog appears. (Inventory and Circulation Desk share the same password.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-216.html>PAGE 216</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-217.html>PAGE 217</a></h6><p>Chapter 20 Taking inventory of your collection This chapter provides detailed instructions for the entire inventory process, including the different methods of entering items into inventory. You'll also learn what to do if you finalized inventory too soon and how to indicate that an item is missing without running an inventory. Note: If you are taking inventory of your collection for the first time, we recommend that you read Chapter 19, Inventory basics.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-218.html>PAGE 218</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 complete, close the progress dialog. The Inventory main window now allows you to enter barcode scans directly, and enables all of the other Inventory options: This information only appears when a partial inventory is in progress. To enter inventory data from a PHD or data file, see pages 221 and 227, respectively. Shows the number of copies ac counted for (Marked), that need to be accounted for (Unmarked), and that were Missing when you began this inventory.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-219.html>PAGE 219</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 20 Taking inventory of your collection or cataloging workstation. This method lets you use multiple, non networked computers for taking inventory. If you add items to the data file as you find them on the shelf, you can generate a list of items that are shelved out of order when you process the data. For more information, see Using a portable computer to inventory your collection" on page 223.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-220.html>PAGE 220</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 Inventory messages (Cont.) Message Cause ... fine has been assessed to ... This message appears if the scanned barcode corresponds to an item that has a copy status of Checked Out and is overdue. In ventory checks in the item and generates a fine. The inventory status remains Marked. . . . paid a fine for the lost book and will be credited with a refund of $ . . .</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-221.html>PAGE 221</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 20 Taking inventory of your collection Using a PHD to inventory your collection Using a PHD to inventory your collection eliminates the extra work of bringing the books to a workstation, thereby decreasing your overall inventory time. If you scan the items in the order you find them on the shelves, Inventory can check your shelf order when you process the data. Before you start scanning, make sure to check the batteries in your PHD.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-222.html>PAGE 222</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 2. To transfer the scans from the PHD, from the Inventory main window, click Remote or select Inventory | Remote Inventory. The Remote Inventory dialog appears: Select the PHD model you're using. To identify items that are shelved out of order, set the Shelf Checking options. For more information, see the following table. To change the transfer settings, see step 3.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-223.html>PAGE 223</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 20 Taking inventory of your collection 4. Once you've selected the correct PHD model and adjusted the PHD settings as desired, simply follow the instructions displayed in the window. After the data is processed, a message appears asking if you want to save the remote inventory data (barcode scans). We recommend that you always save your remote inventory data until inventory has been completed.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-224.html>PAGE 224</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 To make disks for use on the portable computer, the program files must be copied onto them. Use the following steps to create as many remote batch disks as you'll need to inventory your collection. We recommend that you do not exceed 1500 scans on any one remote batch disk. 1. Insert a blank, formatted, high density disk into the floppy drive of a Circulation Plus workstation. From the Windows Desktop, double click the My Computer icon. The My Computer dialog appears. 2.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-225.html>PAGE 225</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 20 Taking inventory of your collection As you enter items, the number of records (scans) in the data file increases, as does the number of bytes. Note: We recommend that you do not ex ceed 1500 records on a remote batch disk. The different values in Records in file" and Records this session" show that you are adding to an existing data file. After scanning the section, press ESC to close the Barcode Entry screen, and press ESC again to exit the Remote Batch Disk utility.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-226.html>PAGE 226</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 Example: A Follett Classic barcode, T 12345, is scanned as T<space>0012345. If you type in this barcode, you must type in T<space>0012345 and press the Return key before entering the next barcode. 6. After you have scanned or typed the barcodes you want to include in this remote batch file, you must save the file as a TEXT file. Inventory uses ASCII text only; it cannot read other word processor specific formats, such as ClarisWorks or Word.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-227.html>PAGE 227</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 20 Taking inventory of your collection Game card interface scanner: Type either UKMIC (IBM Micro Channel computers only) or UKREG (any other game card interfaced scanner) and press ENTER. Type RMTBAT and press ENTER. To complete the file, press F6 (which inserts a ^Z) and press ENTER. After all your disks are ready, type EXIT to close the MS DOS window. With the portable computer turned off, move it to the section you'll be scanning and connect the scanner.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-228.html>PAGE 228</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 Interpreting the Remote Inventory exception report The Remote Inventory exception report alerts you to items that may require some follow up on your part. Only Missing items are checked in and made Available when you process remote inventory data. Inventory does not change the copy status of items that are Checked Out, On Loan, At The Bindery, On Hold, or Lost. The exception report is available from the Exception Reports folder inside of your Follett folder.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-229.html>PAGE 229</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 20 Taking inventory of your collection The following table lists messages that may appear on the Remote Inventory exception report: Remote Inventory exception messages Exception message What it means INACTIVE: <barcode number> Inventory couldn't find a match for the barcode in your data base. First, try rescanning the barcode. Since the title probably already exists, you may need to add a new copy for the title. For more information, see Chapter 24, Working with copies.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-230.html>PAGE 230</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 Remote Inventory exception messages (Cont.) Exception message What it means WARNING: Difference between call numbers of current and next copy is greater than selected dif ference of <check dewey op tion>. Based on the selection you made in the Remote Inventory dialog under Shelf Checking, Inventory determined that the Dewey number span between two consecutive items is greater than the value you specified. WARNING: Shelf is out of order.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-231.html>PAGE 231</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 20 Taking inventory of your collection Printing reports of your Missing items After you finalize your inventory, print an Inventory List by Title and an Inventory List by Call Number that show your Missing items. The call number report will not show items that have a copy status of Lost because they have an inventory status of Marked. If you also want to see a list of your Lost items, you can print a Copy List by Status and select Lost as the copy status.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-232.html>PAGE 232</a></h6><p>Inventory 04/04 Marking items Missing outside an inventory Occasionally there will be items that are missing from the shelf but have a copy status of Available and an inventory status of Marked. If you're not in the middle of an inventory, you can still change the inventory status of these items to Missing in Cataloging. Changing an item's inventory status from Marked to Missing also changes the copy status from Available to Missing.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-233.html>PAGE 233</a></h6><p>Cataloging Chapter 21 Cataloging basics This chapter provides a brief introduction to the Cataloging module and MARC records. You'll also find instructions for customizing the Cataloging toolbar, setting up security, searching different databases for the records you want, and adding, deleting, or printing out MARC records. Cataloging 101 Cataloging helps you maintain your library materials database.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-234.html>PAGE 234</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 The details of the MARC standard are beyond the scope of this guide. However, if you would like additional information about the MARC bibliographic or authority record standard, we recommend the following publications: Document Description Available from: MARC Bibliographic and MARC Authority Format Guides Two separate desktop flip charts. One contains the more common MARC bibliographic tags, in numeric order, with examples.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-235.html>PAGE 235</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 21 Cataloging basics Starting Cataloging To start Cataloging, from the computer desktop, open the Follett Applications folder and double click the Cataloging icon. You can also access the Follett Applications menu from the Windows Start | Programs menu or from the Mac OS Apple menu. If you are using the password option from System Setup's Site setup (see page 40), a password dialog appears. Enter the Cataloging password (by default MODTITLE) and click OK.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-236.html>PAGE 236</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Edit Contains commands for editing text and inserting diacritics in MARC records (see page 276), accessing the global and individual update and delete features, and several PHD options (see Chapter 27, Maintaining your collection"). Individual update and PHD options aren't available in Union Catalog Plus. Search Tag and Subfield Contain the commands for maintaining tags and subfields in the MARC Editor (see pages 266 and 274, respectively).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-237.html>PAGE 237</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 21 Cataloging basics In addition to search buttons, there are several linking buttons: The Find-It-All button launches your browser and opens the Find-It-All Collection (if you have purchased a subscription) from Cataloging. From this Web page, you can search your local collection, subscription databases, and the Internet, all from the same interface.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-238.html>PAGE 238</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Cataloging Security When you want to limit the access that your student helpers or aides have in Cataloging, you can configure the individual workstations they use by following these steps: 1. From the File menu, select File | Limit Cataloging Access. The Limit Cataloging Access dialog appears: Enter a new password. If you elect to use the default, MODTITLE, remember that it appears in the User's Guide. Click OK to start the Limited Access mode.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-239.html>PAGE 239</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 21 Cataloging basics Clearing this check box: Has this effect ( it also removes any toolbar button ) : Delete Copies Disables Edit | Delete Copies via PHD Disables Edit | Delete Copies via Scanner Disables the Delete Copy button in the MARC Viewer Disables the Delete Titles/Copies After Export check box on any of the Export MARC 21/852 Holdings Format dialogs Copy Call Number Editing Disables the Call number text box on the Edit Copy dialog Add/Edit/Delete Authority Disables File | Ad</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-240.html>PAGE 240</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Clearing this check box: Has this effect ( it also removes any toolbar button ) : Update Keywords Disables Tools | Update Keywords Rebuild Cross-References Disables Tools | Rebuild Cross-References TITLEWAVE Disables Tools | Go to TITLEWAVE netLibrary Disables Tools | Go to netLibrary Limiters Disables Tools | Limiters Book Cart Disables Tools | Book Cart Book Cart Recon Disables Tools | Recon in the Book Cart Acquisitions Disables Orders access Disabling access to</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-241.html>PAGE 241</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 21 Cataloging basics Try more than one type of search. Start with one of the standard numbers, such as the LCCN, ISBN, or ISSN to find a specific record. If you don't have one of these numbers, try searching by the title, author, or subject. 1. Enter your search term in the search text box. The success of your search can depend on your search term; enter as much of the search term as you can. 2. Choose Local Database from the drop-down menu to the right. 3.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-242.html>PAGE 242</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 To set your limiters, select Limiters from the Tools menu or toolbar: Click to save the limiters. Reading levels can range from 0.1 to 20.0. To enter a number above 14.9, type it in the text box. To limit the search to one member database available only for Union Catalog Plus Note: For the reading and interest levels limiters to be effective, your records must contain information in a 521 tag. For more information on cataloging reading and inter est levels, see page 634.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-243.html>PAGE 243</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 21 Cataloging basics To begin a search, enter a range of Reading levels between 0.0 and 15.0, or select All. Each title in the Accelerated Reader program is worth a certain number of points, ranging from 0.0 to 130.0. To limit your search to titles that are above or below a certain point value, enter a point value range. If you want to find a title about a particular subject, or by a certain author, make sure you enter that information too. When you're ready, click Search.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-244.html>PAGE 244</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 particular subject, or by a certain author, enter that information too. When you are ready, click Search. Click to open the Lexile dialog, or use the Search menu. Enter a Lexile Measure. The search can be narrowed to plus or minus 0, 50, or 100 Lexiles. Any entries here are optional. In addition to searching for Lexile measures, you can include Beginning Reader and Non Prose Titles.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-245.html>PAGE 245</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 21 Cataloging basics If you want to find a title about a particular subject, or by a certain author, make sure you enter that information too. Only the first five hundred titles display, so you are more likely to receive relevant titles if you use specific point values and keywords. When you're ready, click Search. Click to open the RC dialog, or use the Search menu. To narrow the search, select the reading level, and/or the point value. Any entries here are optional.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-246.html>PAGE 246</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 1. Select one or both of the check boxes. 2. Choose Alliance Plus Online or one of your Alliance Plus CDs in the list. 3. To close the dialog when you are finished, click Save. 4. Back in the main window, on Cataloging's toolbar, choose Selected Database Sources from the database drop-down list.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-247.html>PAGE 247</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 21 Cataloging basics You may not have access to Alliance Plus Online and are searching only Alliance Plus CDs. If so, instead of selecting your database on the Data Source Setup dialog, it's quicker to select the desired CD from the list on the toolbar: Select the CD you want to search. If you've added or switched Alliance Plus CDs since starting Cataloging, select File | Refresh CDs to update the database drop-down list.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-248.html>PAGE 248</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Using your search results After most search requests, a selection list highlighting the closest match appears. The selection list identifies the search type and search term used. If your search required an exact match (e.g., LCCN and barcode searches), the record opens in the MARC Viewer. If so, skip to page 249. Note: Keyword and Power searches return a list of the bibliographic records that meet your keyword criteria.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-249.html>PAGE 249</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 21 Cataloging basics 249 If you're searching Selected Database Sources, the selection list shows (from left to right) the title, the matching entry, and the source of each record. If you're searching for authority records, the selection list shows the heading, usage, and the date the record was last updated. If the selection list doesn't include the item you want, try another type of search.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-250.html>PAGE 250</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 When you display a netLibrary eBook, there is an additional button on the lower right corner of the window for previewing the item. Click the Preview button to launch your browser and open the eBook at the netLibrary Web site. In OPAC Display, the netLibrary hyperlink (856 tag) does not appear. In some bibliographic records, you might notice certain electronic access (Elec. Access) hyperlinks (856 tags) appear and print from the OPAC Display but not in the MARC Proof Sheet Display.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-251.html>PAGE 251</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 21 Cataloging basics To access title information, click the TitlePeek button. The available information appears in your browser. Adding, saving, copying, and editing MARC records If the record you want doesn't exist in your database, you can create a new record from scratch, or copy or import it from another source. If you find the record on Alliance Plus Online, on an Alliance Plus CD, or at your union catalog, you can copy it into your collection and add your local copy information.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-252.html>PAGE 252</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 View window, click Save; or, from the selection list, highlight the desired record, select File | Add Title, and click Yes to the message asking if you want to duplicate the record. You can then edit it, if needed, and add copies. To create a bibliographic record from scratch, select File | Add Title, and then either Easy (Editor) or MARC (Editor). If it appears, click No to the message asking if you want to duplicate the record.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-253.html>PAGE 253</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 21 Cataloging basics Cataloging can automatically delete a MARC record when its last copy is deleted. To enable this feature, open the System Setup module, select Setup | Cataloging | Misc, and select the Delete Title When Last Copy is Deleted check box. You can also globally delete MARC records that have no copies. See page 335 for more information about Global Delete Titles Without Copies. Printing MARC records Cataloging also lets you print a variety of information.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-254.html>PAGE 254</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-255.html>PAGE 255</a></h6><p>Chapter 22 Using the Easy Editor This chapter provides information and instructions for adding and editing bibliographic records in the Easy Editor. Even if you have little or no cataloging experience, the Easy Editor lets you create solid MARC records and perform other routine cataloging tasks. Note: Although identified by descriptive prompts, when you enter information into the Easy Editor, you are creating a MARC record.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-256.html>PAGE 256</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 appears, giving you the option to duplicate the selected record. Select Yes to duplicate the record or No to start from scratch. To edit a record, from the MARC View window (see page 249), select File | Edit Title | Easy. If the Easy Editor was selected as your preferred editor (see Setting up miscellaneous Cataloging options" on page 55), just click Edit. The Easy Editor opens on the Brief MARC Record tab.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-257.html>PAGE 257</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 22 Using the Easy Editor Group/Field What it contains Tips Title Main title Subtitle Additions to the main title Responsibility People who created this title (author, edi tor, narrator, illustrator, etc.) Usually only the first word of the main title and proper nouns are capitalized. If you're cataloging a book, you can find most of this information on the title page. Title Note: Easy Editor adds the ending punctuation in these fields. Note: You must enter uniform titles" (e.g.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-258.html>PAGE 258</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 the interest grade level, or study program information. You can often locate this information on a book's copyright page. If your library participates in the Accelerated Reader program, enter either Accelerated Reader" or AR" in the Study Program text box. If you have Reading Counts!, enter either Reading Counts" or RC" there. You can, then, locate the items by using the reading program's search dialog in Cataloging and in the text OPAC.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-259.html>PAGE 259</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 22 Using the Easy Editor Providing access through subjects Subjects help your patrons find titles with a common topic. Use the options on this tab to maintain subjects for this title. To enter a new subject, from the first drop down list select the category that matches the subject's primary term. If the subject needs additional definition, you can select up to three subcategories.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-260.html>PAGE 260</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Providing additional entries On the last tab, enter any personal names (other than the main entry author) that are associated with the title. Add co-authors, illustrators, compilers, or editors, to provide additional access to the record. Add any additional personal names associated with this title: authors, illustrators, editors. Option What it contains Tips Name Co authors, illustrators, etc. Dates Any dates associated with a name. Enter names with the last name first (e.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-261.html>PAGE 261</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 22 Using the Easy Editor Using the Find Headings feature To create consistency in your collection, Find Headings allows you to quickly retrieve a list of existing author, subject, or series headings from which to select. The Find Headings button becomes enabled whenever you are in an author, subject, or series field within the Easy Editor. Click Select to pull this heading into the Easy Editor.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-262.html>PAGE 262</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 What's next? After making all the necessary changes to a record, click Save. When you save a bibliographic record, Cataloging checks that you entered the required title information, formats the standard numbers (LCCN, ISBN, ISSN), and verifies that you haven't inadvertently duplicated a standard number from another record.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-263.html>PAGE 263</a></h6><p>Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor This chapter provides information and instructions for manually adding and editing bibliographic and authority records in the MARC Editor. If you are comfortable with the MARC standard, the MARC Editor lets you take full advantage of its detail and flexibility. Although the details of the MARC standard are beyond the scope of this guide, if you would like additional information, we recommend the publications listed on page 234.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-264.html>PAGE 264</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Adding new bibliographic records To add a bibliographic record from scratch, you first need to select a template for the title information. From the selection list or MARC View window (see pages 248 and 249), choose File | Add Title | MARC. Or if the MARC Editor is selected as your preferred editor, click + Title (see Setting up miscellaneous Cataloging options" on page 55). If a message appears giving you the option to duplicate the selected record, select No.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-265.html>PAGE 265</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor The MARC Editor: an overview With the MARC Editor window opened, you're ready to enter or edit the record's information. The MARC Editor organizes the MARC record into tags and their subfields: Insert a new tag or delete the current tag and its subfields (see page 267). Insert or delete a single subfield (see page 274). Find Headings button (cursor in Author field) For help with a specific tag, put your cursor anywhere in the tag's subfield data and click Help.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-266.html>PAGE 266</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Brief records contain enough information to let you circulate the item. However, they lack detail, which can make them difficult to locate during a search. Additionally, brief records may not have enough information to prevent them from being duplicated during Cataloging's import process. Full records provide a greater level of detail, including the fields for brief records plus subject headings and notes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-267.html>PAGE 267</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor will find that many of the tags you need are already listed. From that starting point, you can add tags as you need them. (For a complete listing of the tags recognized by Cataloging, see Appendix B, Bibliographic and authority tags.") To insert a tag, position your cursor above the desired insertion point and click the Insert tag button, or select Tag | Insert Tag.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-268.html>PAGE 268</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Bibliographic fixed-length tags As the name implies, fixed-length tags have a pre defined number of spaces. Each space (or position) in a fixed-length tag has a specific meaning. For example, positions 35-37 of the 008 tag contain an item's 3-digit language code. Normally, the fixed-length tags (000-009) won't require much modification. Even when you add a fixed-length tag to a record, Cataloging uses the record's template to supply the most common settings for that material type.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-269.html>PAGE 269</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor 269 To change the material type and its icon, access the MARC Leader Codes dialog as instructed above, and select the correct Record type (06) from the list: Click to display the list of material types.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-270.html>PAGE 270</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Record type code Material type Uses j musical sound recording music on CD, cassette, or vinyl k two-dimensional nonprojected graphic activity cards, charts, drawings, flash cards, paintings, photographs, pictures, postcards, posters, prints, study prints, technical drawings m computer file software, numeric data, multimedia, online systems or services o kit any kit with two or more media types, none of which is dominant p mixed material materials in two or more forms</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-271.html>PAGE 271</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor 006 tag The 006 tag is a repeatable material type tag that lets you identify accompanying materials or an item with multiple characteristics (for example, an item that is both a map and a puzzle). By default, the 006 tag isn't included in any of the bibliographic templates. To add it, position your cursor above the desired insertion point and click the Insert tag button, or select Tag | Insert Tag. On the Insert Tag dialog that appears, enter 006 and click Insert.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-272.html>PAGE 272</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 007 tag The 007 (Physical Description) tag is an optional, repeatable tag. Some bibliographic records have multiple 007 tags, while some audiovisual material records have none. The information in the 007 tag must agree with the 008 tag, and vice versa. By default, the 007 tag isn't included in any of the bibliographic templates. To add it, follow the instructions on page 267.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-273.html>PAGE 273</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor To edit the 008 tag, double click in the 008 data, or with your cursor in the 008 field, choose Tag | Edit 008 tag. The Fixed Field 008 Tag Editor dialog appears: Edit the common 008 values as necessary. Click on the middle button to edit the material-type values. Click OK to retain the material specific values, then OK to retain the common values.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-274.html>PAGE 274</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Editing indicators Indicator buttons To edit a tag's indicator, click on the indicator button. (If there are no defined values for that indicator, a message appears asking if you want to proceed.) The Edit Indicator dialog appears: Either type the indicator value in the text box and click OK or double click on the value. Be sure to set the indicator for any nonfiling characters.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-275.html>PAGE 275</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor To add a subfield to a tag, position your cursor in the tag and click the Insert subfield button, or select Subfield | Insert Subfield. The Insert Subfield dialog lists all of that tag's repeatable (R) subfields and all the unused nonrepeatable (NR) subfields: Either type the subfield code in the text box and click Insert or double click on the subfield. If you're not sure of the subfield code, use the scroll bar to look for the subfield you want.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-276.html>PAGE 276</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 If the you need to, you can also add diacritics and other common symbols to your subfield data. To insert a diacritic or symbol, place your cursor where you want the diacritic, then click the Diac's button or select Edit | Insert Diacritic. The Insert Diacritic dialog appears: Select the character you want and click Insert.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-277.html>PAGE 277</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor 2. If there is already data in the Author, Subject, or Series field, it appears in the Find nearest text box. If the Find nearest text box is empty, enter your search text to search for an author's name, a subject heading, or series name, and press the Find button. A list of headings appears. 3. Highlight the desired heading in the list. Click Select to copy all of the heading's subfields to your MARC record.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-278.html>PAGE 278</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Working with authority records In everyday conversation and writing, we refer to people, physical objects, and abstract concepts by different names. For example, cars can be called automobiles or motor cars. If entries into a library catalog were this random, it would be nearly impossible to find everything on a given subject or by a certain author. The solution is the use of authorized headings.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-279.html>PAGE 279</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor quickly locate a record, use the Find Headings button in the MARC Editor to search the existing authority headings for an author, subject, or series. To add an authority record from scratch, continue with the following section, Adding new authority records." To duplicate the selected authority record, from the selection list or MARC View window (see pages 248 and 249), select File | Add Authority or click + Authority.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-280.html>PAGE 280</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 The following table shows the relationship between the authority templates, their authority tags, and some of the bibliographic tags they parallel. Some terms can have multiple applications in bibliographic records. For example, Elizabeth Smith can be the author or subject of a book. Topical, geographic, and genre terms aren't usually used as author or uniform title entries.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-281.html>PAGE 281</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor page 273). However, as described in the following sections, authority records have a few special considerations when it comes to fixed-length tags and cross reference creation. Authority fixed-length tags These authority fixed-length tags are slightly different than the bibliographic tags with the same names. Leader tag The Leader contains a record's processing data. Cataloging provides most of this information automatically.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-282.html>PAGE 282</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 To edit the 008 tag, double click in the 008 data, or with your cursor in the 008 field, choose Tag | Edit 008 tag. The Fixed Field 008 Tag Editor dialog appears: Use the radio buttons to toggle between positions 6-15 and 16-39. Series heading control Name heading control Subject heading control Part of the 008 tag's function is to determine how the authority record should be used when creating cross references.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-283.html>PAGE 283</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 23 Using the MARC Editor If a bibliographic record uses the authorized form in an indexed subject, author, or series heading, Cataloging can use the tracing information in the authority record to create cross references. Important: Cross references are created automatically if you choose to create them as authority records are saved (see Setting up miscellaneous Cataloging options," page 55).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-284.html>PAGE 284</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 If you wanted to suppress all cross references from that tag, from the Reference display drop down list you would select a = Reference not displayed." Now the related heading is recorded in the authority record, but is not cross referenced in Cataloging or OPAC. What's next? After making all the necessary changes to a record, click the Save button or choose File | Save Record. When you save an authority record, Cataloging checks for the 008 and 1XX tags.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-285.html>PAGE 285</a></h6><p>Chapter 24 Working with copies Each item in the library book or otherwise needs a place to store its unique information, such as the copy barcode and call number. The Copy Editor provides you with an easy way to enter and maintain copy information. This chapter provides instructions for adding, editing, and deleting individual copies.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-286.html>PAGE 286</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 If a title already has a copy, you can choose to duplicate (replicate) the highlighted copy after clicking Add Copy. The duplicate retains most of the original's information and updates the Inventory Status (to Marked), Copy Status (to Available), and Acquisition Date (to today's date). From the Add or Edit Copy dialog you can add or update the copy's information: You can scan or type a barcode for the copy, or click Assign Barcode.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-287.html>PAGE 287</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 24 Working with copies In addition to the information on the previous page, there are a few things to keep in mind when adding or editing copies: For accurate updates and reports, be sure to leave a space between any call number prefix and the call number. You can attach Vendor or Funding Source information to a copy by clicking Select next to each field and choosing from the stored list. To add vendors or funding sources to the lists, click New.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-288.html>PAGE 288</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 The Checkouts button is not available. The Description/Enumeration, Vendor, and Funding Source drop down lists contain the entries of the union catalog, not those of the members. The Copy Status drop down box is not available. The copy status is set to Available when adding a copy. The Inventory Status drop down box is not available. The status is set to Marked when adding a copy. The Copy Note and Circulation Note text boxes are not available.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-289.html>PAGE 289</a></h6><p>Chapter 25 Importing MARC records This chapter includes instructions for the different methods of importing bibliographic and authority records and interpreting the exception report. Use the import options on the File menu to transfer MARC records in the MARC 21/852 Holdings format or MARC 21 Authority format: Select this option to import new MARC 21 title and copy records from a vendor or another library. Select this also when importing WebPath Express bibliographic records (BIB856.001).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-290.html>PAGE 290</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Subfields in the 852 tag Copy fields _p Barcode (up to 14 characters) _t Copy Number (up to 5 characters) _9 Price (up to 10 digits total 8 before a decimal point and 2 after). Prices without a decimal point are considered to have two decimal places (e.g., _9150 would appear in the copy record as $1.50). _x Your data vendor can use subfield _x (a repeatable, non public note) for additional copy information.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-291.html>PAGE 291</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 25 Importing MARC records the import runs faster, but you then need to run the Update Keywords utility before you can perform keyword searches (see page 345). Important: If you need to import records from a Winnebago database, there are some additional steps you should take. See page 297 for details. Importing MARC 21/852 Holdings data This feature lets you import MARC 21/852 Holdings title/copy records from a vendor or another library.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-292.html>PAGE 292</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Important for Winnebago Imports: When you select the Winnebago Records option, you're alerted that some additional processing may be necessary. If your database already contains records, you will also be reminded to run a backup before proceeding (see page 607). When importing Winnebago records, the Import button is disabled because you must first preview the results of your import. However, before you proceed, make certain that you review the information starting on page 297.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-293.html>PAGE 293</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 25 Importing MARC records Example: If you enter 1000 in the text box, Import assigns that barcode number to the first copy record without a barcode, 1001 to the next, and 1002 to the next. If 1003 is already in use by a copy in your database, Import skips 1003 and assigns 1004 next. Always assign next available barcode" ignores any barcode in the incoming 852_p. Import assigns a new barcode to every incoming copy, starting with the number in the Starting at text box.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-294.html>PAGE 294</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 The category names that are defined in your System Setup are used. If an incoming copy has an undefined category code, a new one is created and named n Added by Import" (n" is the undefined category code). You can change this name, or delete the category altogether, in System Setup (see page 53). In Cataloging, you can assign additional categories to the copies with a PHD (see page 338), in the Copy Editor (page 286), or in the Individual Update dialog (page 330).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-295.html>PAGE 295</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 25 Importing MARC records For Union Catalog Plus: Assigning copies on import The import dialog is slightly different if you are importing to Union Catalog Plus. To assign the copies to a member, select the option which best suits your needs. After selecting your assignment method, continue with step 2 on page 292. To assign the copies to the union catalog member whose MOC is in the MARC record's 852a tag, select this radio button. Note: The MOC must be defined in Member setup.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-296.html>PAGE 296</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 1. From the Cataloging main window, choose File | Import MARC 21/852 Holdings Format by Barcode. The dialog appears, warning you that this option updates your database, and recommending that you back up your system before proceeding. Checking Add Titles to Book Cart creates a list of the titles imported that you can recon, or sort by call number, author, or title, and print. For more information on Book Cart features, see page 346. 2.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-297.html>PAGE 297</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 25 Importing MARC records 3. When the import is complete, a message appears asking if you want to import another file. When you are finished importing, click Close. The application generates an exception report if any errors were encountered during the import (see Interpreting the exception report," page 308). For Winnebago records: Reconstructing your barcodes and more Not all MARC records are created equal. To import title and copy records from Winnebago's CIRC/CAT v6.7 or Spectrum v3.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-298.html>PAGE 298</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Important: Not counting any Follett Classic barcodes (seven digits or less), in this scenario the rest of the material/barcode numbers must be the same length (e.g., eight digits long). If you have numbers of varying lengths, you must choose the one length (i.e., symbology) you want to use. Before exporting the rest of the items, you'll need to give them new barcodes that conform to either Follett Classic guidelines or to your selected barcode symbology.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-299.html>PAGE 299</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 25 Importing MARC records For example, if your collection contains both Follett Classic barcodes and Code 39 Mod 10 barcodes, export the Follett Classic barcodes to one file and the Code 39 Mod 10 barcodes to a second file. Make certain to note what symbology each file contains. Note: If your collection contains items that you received from another library, they may still be using their original barcodes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-300.html>PAGE 300</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Field name v6.7 v3.x v4.x Changes Call number X X Call numbers with more than 30 characters are truncated and a message indicating the affected record is written to the exception report. Fund X X Funding source information in tag 852_x is moved to tag 852_xFUND: and truncated to 24 characters. A message indicating the truncated record is written to the exception report. X X Tag 852_a is reserved for your library's MARC Organization Code (MOC).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-301.html>PAGE 301</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 25 Importing MARC records Field name User defined 2 v6.7 v3.x v4.x Changes X X The contents of tag 961_u are copied to a 590 tag. Please note that your export/import file contains the contents of the field, not the field name.* * This information was displayed with your copy information in the Winnebago catalog applica tions. As a rule, the Follett Software OPACs do not display the local information stored in 9xx tags.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-302.html>PAGE 302</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 In CIRC/CAT v6.7, start from the system's main menu and select Winnebago CIRC/CAT | Setup/Utilities | System Utilities | Setup Barcodes. If you're importing from a Winnebago Spectrum v3.x database, you'll need to examine your barcodes to determine what they contain. For help, see What does a barcode contain?" on page 647. Unless it's Follett Classic," you'll need the name of the barcode symbology you're importing. For descriptions of the different symbologies, see page 649.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-303.html>PAGE 303</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 25 Importing MARC records Barcode format Type indicator Location code Fill character Reconstructed barcode 4. BBBBBBBFIF 3 0 002567403R 5. ILLLLFFBBBBBBF 3 1234 1 3123411025674$ 6. ILLLLBBBBBBBBF 3 1234 3123400025674. 7. ILLLLBBBBBBBBB 3 1234 31234000025674 8. ILLLLFFBBBBBBB 3 1234 0 31234000025674 9. ILLLLFFBBBBBBB 3 1234 1 31234110025674 Note: The check digits in examples 4-6 were reconstructed using the Code 39 Mod 43 algorithm.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-304.html>PAGE 304</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 After entering your barcode format, click Next to proceed. Important: All the barcode information you enter in the Barcode Wizard must match the symbology you defined in System Setup (see page 39). 2. If your barcode format indicates that the barcodes in the import file are intact and are a Follett Classic symbology (e.g., BBBBBBB), the Barcode Wizard skips to step 6 (page 306).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-305.html>PAGE 305</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 25 Importing MARC records Note: Remember that even though a symbology can have up to six type identifiers, you must import only one identifier at a time. After entering the type identifier, click Next to proceed. 4. If your barcode format doesn't include a location code (indicated by four Ls), the Barcode Wizard skips to step 5. If your format does include a location code, enter the four digit code that identifies your library. Enter the four digit location code for your library.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-306.html>PAGE 306</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 If your format does include fill character(s), enter the alpha or numeric character that is used. Typically, the fill character is a leading zero. Enter the fill character used by the records you're importing. After entering the fill character, click Finish. 6. Once you've entered all the information that the Barcode Wizard needs to rebuild your barcodes, a message appears informing you that the preview process is ready to begin. Click OK to continue. A progress dialog appears.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-307.html>PAGE 307</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 25 Importing MARC records When the import process is complete, close the progress dialog. If any errors were encountered, the application generates an exception report. The majority of these errors will be identical to those encountered during the preview. However, since some errors may require you to make manual changes to your records, we recommend that you print the exception report and save it when prompted.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-308.html>PAGE 308</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Warning: All changes made to your database are immediate. You cannot reverse changes that have been made by canceling the process. (Please note that the Preview process does not alter your data.) 3. When the import is complete, a message appears asking if you want to import another file. When you are finished importing, click Close. The application generates an exception report if any errors were encountered during the import (see Interpreting the exception report," page 308).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-309.html>PAGE 309</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 25 Importing MARC records Exception message What it means Copy entry <number of copy> con tains no barcode. The import encountered a copy without a barcode and the Assign Barcode option was not used. The copy was skipped. Copy entry <number of copy> has more than eight categories. The import encountered a copy with more than eight categories. The first eight categories were saved and the rest discarded. None of the valid copy fields were affected. Copy not saved <error code>.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-310.html>PAGE 310</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Exception message What it means The MARC record does not contain a 245 tag, Title Statement. 245 tag created from existing <main title tag>. The import encountered a MARC record that did not con tain a 245 tag. Since the Follett Software applications re quire each bibliographic record to contain a 245 tag (also recommended by the Library of Congress), one was added to the record using the contents of another main title tag (130, 240, 246, or 247) in the record.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-311.html>PAGE 311</a></h6><p>Chapter 26 Exporting MARC records Eventually, you'll need to make copies of some or all of the MARC records in your database. Perhaps you want to share records with other libraries or schools, or you have to divide your collection because of a change in the school district. Maybe you need to send your data to Follett Software or another vendor for a retrospective conversion. The export options in Cataloging allow you to do this.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-312.html>PAGE 312</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Exporting bibliographic records To export title and copy records, from the Cataloging main window, choose File | Export MARC 21/852 Holdings Format: From the submenu, choose the export method you want to use. To export all the titles in your collection, select No Range. To export a specific range of titles, select one of the other export options.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-313.html>PAGE 313</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 26 Exporting MARC records If you are exporting by a list of LCCN, ISBN, or ISSN numbers, the dialog looks like this: Select one of these radio buttons for your standard number. You can use all three types in one list. Type or scan the number in the text box, and click Add. Note: With a properly configured scanner, you can scan ISBN barcodes. Select the ISBN radio button, position your cursor in the Number text box, and then scan the barcode.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-314.html>PAGE 314</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 To search for records to define your range, click Starting At or Ending At. A dialog, specific to your search, appears: If you clicked the Starting At button first, Cataloging highlights the first item in the library database. If you clicked the Ending At button first, it highlights the last item in the database. Type your search term in the text box, and then click Find. The closest match to the search term is highlighted in the selection list.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-315.html>PAGE 315</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 26 Exporting MARC records Selected range Things to remember Acquisition date Checks the copy record for this date. Specify a starting and ending date between 1/1/1980 and 12/31/2037. Note that the titles exported may have copies with other acquisition dates that fall outside the range. Only copies with acquisition dates within the range are included in the export. Title date added/updated Checks the title record 005 tag and the copy record for this date.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-316.html>PAGE 316</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Export includes all the copy fields except two: The Copy Note and the Circulation Note are not exported to a MARC file. These fields are actually text files that have no corresponding subfield in the 852 tag. 3. Delete Titles/Copies After Export: This option is usually used for clean up, or splitting a collection. Title records and all copies attached to the title are deleted, even if you're not exporting copy information.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-317.html>PAGE 317</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 26 Exporting MARC records For Union Catalog Plus: Exporting MARC 21/852 Holdings Format If you are cataloging in Union Catalog Plus, you have slightly different export dialogs. On each of them, you can choose to export all the records in the union catalog or select one member's holdings. The dialogs include a Members button and, at the bottom, either All Members (by default) or the name of the selected member. Export via PHD and by Category, however, are not available for union catalogs.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-318.html>PAGE 318</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Exporting authority records To export authority records, from the Cataloging main window, choose File | Export MARC 21 Authority. The Export MARC 21 Authority dialog appears: Exports authority records added or updated within the specified date range. You can either accept the default range or specify your own. Names exports records with a 100, 110, or 111 tag. To start exporting records, click Export. Subjects exports records with a 150, 151, or 155 tag.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-319.html>PAGE 319</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 26 Exporting MARC records 2. If you are using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or a PHD Laser+, select the Inventory mode (press I on the main menu). The SCAN BARCODE prompt appears. Scan or type in the barcodes. If you are using a PHD Dolphin+, choose F1-Circulation Plus from the main menu, then F4-Copies, and then F1-Scan Copies. Use the ON SCAN button to scan the barcodes. When you have collected several scans, your next step is to export and delete the MARC records for those items. a.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-320.html>PAGE 320</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 4. From your shelves, collect the library materials that are moving. Scan or type their barcodes into the To Copy Barcode text box on the Individual Update dialog. 5. When you have scanned all the materials that are moving, your next step is to export the MARC records for the new library's database and delete them from the old library's database. a. Close the Individual Update dialog, and from the menu, select File | Export MARC 21/852 Holdings Format | Category. b.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-321.html>PAGE 321</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 26 Exporting MARC records Interpreting the exception report When exporting bibliographic and copy records, you only have exceptions if you choose to delete the bibliographic records after export, and if, for some reason, a copy could not be deleted. When exporting authority records, exception messages are not generated. This report resides in the Follett folder in a folder named Exception Reports.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-322.html>PAGE 322</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-323.html>PAGE 323</a></h6><p>Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection In this chapter you'll learn how to use reports to analyze your collection, globally update selected headings and copy fields or delete specific tags, update selected fields in individual copies, and use your PHD for mass updates. You'll also learn why you might want to update keywords and rebuild your cross references. Finally, you will see how to use the Book Cart to enhance your records.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-324.html>PAGE 324</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 possible that you may legitimately get duplicate LCCNs; in those cases, try to get a unique ISBN for the record.) Correct standard numbers are important to support matching against Alliance Plus and when importing records. Titles Without Copies: Look at this report when ordering materials. If you are not replacing the copies, you may want to delete the titles. If you keep them, they show up in OPAC, but there won't be any copies for your patrons.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-325.html>PAGE 325</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection Identify the method you want to use to search the library database. To search all the bibliographic records in the database, choose All Records. Select a range of authors, subjects, or series to search. For instructions on selecting the starting and ending records, see page 314. Select the type of tags you want to update. Please note that only indexed tags are updated. For a list of the indexed tags, see Appendix B.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-326.html>PAGE 326</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 3. After reviewing the information, indicate how you want to proceed with the update. Unless you click Cancel, a progress dialog appears while the record is updated (or skipped) and Cataloging searches for the next match. Note: Cataloging won't apply changes that would invalidate the tag. Even if you choose Update, a message appears instructing you to skip the tag. If you select Update All, once processing is complete, the application generates an exception report.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-327.html>PAGE 327</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection Choosing Circulation Type, in the Global Update Copy dialog, lets you quickly update materials for new units or research projects. (For instance, you could change a circulation type of Regular to a circulation type of Non Circulating to keep those materials in the library.) Choose from the Where" list and either choose or enter text in the is" box. Choose the new Circulation Type from the list. After entering your selections, click Update All.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-328.html>PAGE 328</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Vendor List –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Vendor Copies Copies Total Price w/o price –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– .......... .......... **Folet A/V 43 27 $328.95 **Follett A/V 178 36 $2,810.45 **Follett Media Distribution .......... .......... 594 122 $9,340.63 “**” indicates a non–indexed Vendor 2. To add a vendor to the table, open the Select Vendor dialog.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-329.html>PAGE 329</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection b. Click Update All and then Yes to the message. c. In the Global Update Copy progress dialog, verify that the number of Copies Updated matches the number under Copies on the Vendor List. Click Close.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-330.html>PAGE 330</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Updating individual copies This feature lets you assign a category, circulation type, or copy status quickly and easily to a number of copies one at a time. It's useful when you want to make the same change to a group of copies. For example, if you maintain a category for items purchased using funds from Title VI, you can quickly assign the appropriate category to an entire box of items. Likewise, you could update the copy status of books that you're sending to the bindery.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-331.html>PAGE 331</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection To delete your Lost or Missing copies: 1. From the menu, select Edit | Global Delete | Lost (or Missing) Copies. The Global Delete Lost (or Missing) Copies dialog appears: Select to include copies with fines or refunds attached. Select the year, or range of years, that the copies were marked Missing. Select to include copies with fines, refunds, holds, or reserves attached. 2.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-332.html>PAGE 332</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Deleting subject headings by source globally The Global Delete Subject Headings by Source feature lets you quickly find and delete selected subject tags in your bibliographic records. This lets you improve the uniformity, and reduce duplication, of the subject headings in your database. If you purchase our Authority Record Service and opt to import LC or Sears headings only, this feature can help you align your bibliographic records with your authority records.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-333.html>PAGE 333</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection 2. Choose whether you want the exception report to include a list of the deleted subject headings. For faster processing, choose Summary only where the report includes only summary information and processing errors. 3. Click Delete. A progress dialog appears. Warning: All changes made to your copy records are immediate. You cannot reverse changes that have been made by canceling the process. 4.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-334.html>PAGE 334</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Deleting tags globally With Global Delete Tag, you can find and delete any of the following bibliographic tags that contain obsolete, unwanted, or incorrect information: 526 Study program information note 856 Electronic location and access (hyperlinks) 9xx Local information This feature allows you to delete all occurrences of a tag, tags that have a certain subfield, or only tags that have a certain subfield containing specific information. 1.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-335.html>PAGE 335</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection numbers, and the targeted tag. Use this information to help you decide whether to delete the tag or not: Deletes this tag and then searches for the next match The bibliographic record with the matching tag Skips this tag and searches for the next match Deletes all the specified tags Displays the contents of the entire tag, with each subfield on a separate line 3. After reviewing the information in the dialog, indicate how you want to proceed.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-336.html>PAGE 336</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 To delete the title records: 1. From the menu, select Edit | Global Delete | Titles Without Copies. The Global Delete Titles Without Copies dialog appears: Choose to keep certain MARC records that intentionally have no copies. 2. To preserve eBook records, select the first check box. Cataloging considers any MARC record with a in position 6 of the 000 (Leader) tag and s (= electronic) in position 23 of the 008 tag to be an eBook.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-337.html>PAGE 337</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection Using a scanner to delete copies Delete Copies via Scanner lets you remove copies from your database by creating a list of their barcodes. You can create the list either by scanning the barcodes or by manually typing in the barcode numbers. Use this feature when weeding books from your collection. 1. From the menu in Cataloging, select Edit | Delete Copies via Scanner. The dialog appears: Your copies appear here, sorted by barcode number.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-338.html>PAGE 338</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Using your PHD for mass updates With a PHD, you can assign categories, circulation types, or copy status to copies, remove categories from copies, and delete entire copy records. As with all PHD functions, you should already have loaded the PHD application (see page 42) before scanning barcodes. Warning: Remember to erase any previous scans in your PHD so that no records are unintentionally changed or deleted. To erase scans from a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+, see page 664.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-339.html>PAGE 339</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection Choose the field you want to update: Category, Circulation Type, or Copy Status. Then select the option you want to assign. Select the PHD model you're using. To change the transfer settings, click Edit. These instructions change based on the PHD you choose. Warning: To protect your equipment, make sure you turn off your PHD and computer before connecting or disconnecting the PHD. 3. Select the PHD model you're using.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-340.html>PAGE 340</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Interpreting the exception report Any errors encountered during the update are entered on an exception report. This table lists the possible errors and their meanings: Error message Meaning Can't add more than eight categories to copy <barcode> The copy already has the maximum number (8) of categories assigned to it. Copy <barcode> not found The barcode coming in from the PHD couldn't be found in the database.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-341.html>PAGE 341</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection 2. From Cataloging's main window, choose Edit | Remove Category via PHD. The following dialog appears. Select the category you want to remove: Choose the category you want to remove from the scanned copies. Select the PHD model you're using. To change the transfer settings, click Edit. These instructions change based on the PHD you choose.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-342.html>PAGE 342</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Deleting copies with a PHD This option removes copies from your database (for example, the books you're weeding from the collection). Warning: All deletions are immediate. You cannot undo them by canceling the process. Copies are deleted even if they're checked out, on hold, at the bindery, or missing. The data cannot be recovered. Remember to erase any previous scans in your PHD so that no copies are unintentionally deleted.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-343.html>PAGE 343</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection Yes. Once the data transfer process begins, a progress dialog appears. When the process is complete, close the progress dialog and carefully check the exception report. Interpreting the exception report Any errors encountered during the process are entered on an exception report. This table lists the possible errors and their meanings: Error message Meaning Copy checked out to <name> <barcode> made available The copy is checked out.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-344.html>PAGE 344</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Viewing the Weeding log Every time a copy is deleted, Cataloging adds an entry to this cumulative log. View this log when ordering replacement materials or creating budgets and year-end reports. If you want a new log started at the beginning of a school or fiscal year, make sure to delete the old one.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-345.html>PAGE 345</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection Excel imports the file, placing each field in a column with the field name in the first row and hyphens in the second. Tip: For easier viewing, disable word wrapping in your text editor. To edit the Weeding log easily . . . . . . import it into a spreadsheet program. You can delete, rearrange, sort, and filter the rows or columns. You can run the Find feature to locate specific certain data, or, in combination with Replace, update it.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-346.html>PAGE 346</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Rebuilding cross references Use the Rebuild Cross References function to: Build an initial cross reference index Rebuild a corrupted cross reference index Remove blind cross references (cross references to indexable headings that no longer exist in the database because the bibliographic records containing them or the headings themselves have been deleted) See also: For information about how authority records are used to create cross references, see Chapter 23, Using the</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-347.html>PAGE 347</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection | Book Cart | Add Title from the menu. In the MARC Viewer, click the Add to Book Cart button. By range: To add a group of existing records to the Book Cart, select Tools | Book Cart | Add to Book Cart. The Add Titles to Book Cart dialog appears: Click to add these records to the Book Cart. Choose the selection method and the range of records. Choose to include all records, brief only, or full only.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-348.html>PAGE 348</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 your default editor. You could also print a list of these misses and then process any brief records manually with the Process Misses feature in Alliance Plus (titles do need copies for this). Note: Depending on the number of titles and the CD drive speed or the available bandwidth of your network, the recon process may take several hours. See also: For more information about the autorecon process, see page 385.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-349.html>PAGE 349</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection To transfer records to MARC Magician, click the EZ Transfer button or select Tools | Book Cart | EZ Transfer from the menu. The EZ Transfer dialog appears: Enter up to 60 characters to describe this group of records. Enter a description, up to 60 alphanumeric characters, for the group of records that are currently in the Book Cart. The description does not need to be in the form of a file name. You can use terms like October shipment from FLR" or Dewey 133.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-350.html>PAGE 350</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Number Author, Author Title, or Title Author, and choose to display annotations (tags 505 _a, 511_a, or 520_a). Tip: To print a list of new items, add titles to the Book Cart by Acquisition Date. Specify a title for your report. Choose a sort order. Select this box to include annotations in your report.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-351.html>PAGE 351</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 27 Maintaining your collection Merging copies onto one title record Important: If your library is a member of a union using Union Catalog Plus and Data Exchange, merging functionality is not available through the Cataloging module. The Merge and View MARC buttons will not be visible in the Book Cart toolbar. The merging functionality is available in Union Catalog Plus With the Merge feature, you can move copies from one record to another with the click of a button.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-352.html>PAGE 352</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 This process leaves your catalog with the one best" MARC record with all of the copies attached to it. The exception report contains information about each move, each deletion, and any processing errors. Click to view the record. The Merge button is available when two or more titles have been added to the Book Cart. Select the best record. All copies are merged to one MARC record. The call number is taken from the first copy.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-353.html>PAGE 353</a></h6><p>Chapter 28 Cataloging tips This chapter briefly covers some common non book materials that people often catalog. More detailed information on cataloging these materials is available at our Web site at www.fsc.follett.com or from our Marketing department at 1-800-323-3397.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-354.html>PAGE 354</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 With this new source of information, many libraries are giving up their vertical files for all materials except for local, historical, genealogical, and similar types of information. If you still want to catalog your vertical file materials, here are two approaches you can take: Option 1: Catalog each physical vertical file cabinet as a separate record, with subject headings for the file folders and title added entry access. Use the Three Dimensional Artifact, Object template.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-355.html>PAGE 355</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 28 Cataloging tips 521 520 546 600 17 610 27 611 27 630 07 650 7 651 7 700 710 711 730 740 900 1 2 2 0 02 _aAudience note. _aSummary note. _aLanguage note. _aPersonal or family name subject heading. _2sears _aCorporate name subject heading. _2sears _aMeeting name subject heading. _2sears _aUniform title subject heading. _2sears _aTopical subject heading. _2sears _aGeographical name subject heading. _2sears _aAdded entry -- personal name. _aAdded entry -- corporate name.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-356.html>PAGE 356</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 The large number of subfields defined for the 856 tag make it seem more complicated than it is. Although there are many subfields available, only a few are required to enable access. Cataloging tips for the 856 tag Electronic Location and Access (R) Essential components Cataloging guidelines Indicator 1 Access method To create an active link for this tag in the OPACs, Cataloging (OPAC Display only), and WebCollection Plus, set the first indicator to 4.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-357.html>PAGE 357</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 28 Cataloging tips Cataloging local electronic resources Not all electronic resources are on the Internet. You can use the 856 tag to access electronic resources that are stored on your local library or school network. For example, you can provide access to locally created or collected files (much like a vertical file), and eBooks and graphics can be downloaded and stored locally.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-358.html>PAGE 358</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Cataloging electronic resources, especially Web sites, can be a time consuming task.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-359.html>PAGE 359</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 28 Cataloging tips Note: To enable this feature, you must select the Show Authority 856 tags in OPAC option from System Setup's Cataloging Misc tab (see page 55). If an authority record and related bibliographic records contain identical 856 tags, both links appear in the applications. You may want to delete duplicate bibliographic 856 tags to ease future maintenance. To globally delete these tags, see page 334.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-360.html>PAGE 360</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 eBooks eBooks are electronic versions of printed books. The actual file containing the text can reside on a floppy disk, the hard drive of a workstation, your library server, or out on the Internet. You can either include information about an electronic version in a print version record, or create a separate record for the electronic version. If you create a separate record, you can take advantage of the new material type icons for eBooks.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-361.html>PAGE 361</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 28 Cataloging tips 007 Physical Description Fixed Field (R) Using the menu or toolbar button, insert a 007 tag. Position 00 Select c = computer file from the list. Category Position 01 Specific Material Designation Select r = remote for an Internet or network resource, or another code that's appropriate for the carrier. Position 02 Leave blank. Positions 03-05 Select as appropriate. 020 ISBN (R) Add another 020 and enter the electronic book's ISBN. You can add (electronic bk.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-362.html>PAGE 362</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 300 490 530 1 650 0 650 0 650 0 650 0 651 7 655 7 655 7 700 1 740 800 01 1 856 41 900 _bState University of New York Press, _cc1987. _alviii, 682 p., [16] p. of plates : _bill. ; _c24 cm. _aThe writings of James Fenimore Cooper _aAlso available as an electronic reproduction; _bScanitall, Inc., Chicago, Ill. _aBumppo, Natty (Fictitious character) _xFiction. _aFrontier and pioneer life _zNew York (State) _xFiction. _aDelaware Indians _xFiction.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-363.html>PAGE 363</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 28 Cataloging tips 000 Leader For this tag to contain the correct information, select the appropriate Bibliographic Material Type template for the item you are cataloging. For an eBook, choose Book (Monograph). If you are editing an existing print-version record, make sure that the Record Type (position 06) is a=language material. Change any other positions as needed.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-364.html>PAGE 364</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 506 Restrictions on Access Note (R) Both indicators are undefined. Use if applicable. Example: Restricted to account members having a user id and password. 533 Reproduction Note (R) Both indicators are undefined. Contains the information about the electronic version when it differs from that of the item being cataloged. _a Enter the form. Example: Electronic reproduction. _b Enter the place of reproduction.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-365.html>PAGE 365</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 28 Cataloging tips 245 256 260 300 490 500 506 533 534 534 538 650 650 650 650 651 655 655 700 740 800 856 900 _d1789–1851. 14 _aThe deerslayer, or, The first war–path _h[electronic resource] : _cJames Fenimore Cooper ; historical introduction and explanatory notes by James Franklin Beard ; text established by Lance Schachterle, Kent Ljungquist, and James Kilby. _aElectronic data. _aAlbany : _bState University of New York Press, _cc1987. _alviii, 682 p., [16] p. of plates : _bill.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-366.html>PAGE 366</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 additional information, such as price, category, or acquisition date, you can add a copy in the Copy Editor. The netLibrary MARC records from FLR do contain copy information. Note: There is a default circulation type of Non circulating eBook (*NC) to use for non physical copies. If you assign this circulation type, you cannot circulate the copies. They cannot be placed on hold, and always have an inventory status of Marked; in the OPACs, they are always listed as In.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-367.html>PAGE 367</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 28 Cataloging tips A document available on the Web: Ldr 007 008 245 00 256 260 500 538 650 650 0 0 650 7 856 40 300 tag nam a cr cnu 000629s1999 xxuab s 000 0 eng d _aCalifornia Condor Restoration _h[electronic resource]. _aElectronic data. _a[S.l.] : _bPeregrine fund, _cc1999. _aTitle from title page (contents viewed May 4, 2000). _aMode of access: Internet. _aCalifornia condor. _aEndangered species _xUnited States. _aCondors. _2sears _uhttp://www.peregrinefund.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-368.html>PAGE 368</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 007 Physical Description Fixed Field (R) Using the menu or toolbar button, insert a 007 tag. Position 00 Select c = computer file from the list. Category Position 01 Select a code that's appropriate for the carrier (e.g., magnetic disk, tape). Specific Material Designation Position 02 Leave blank. Positions 03-05 Select as appropriate. 245 Title (NR) _h Medium 256 Add a subfield _h after the _a and enter [electronic resource].</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-369.html>PAGE 369</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 28 Cataloging tips 256 260 300 538 500 520 630 630 00 07 650 7 650 650 710 856 0 0 2 42 _cNovell. _aComputer operating system program. _aOrem, Ut. : _bNovell, _c1998, c1993. _a1 CD–ROM ; _c4 3/4 in. _aSystem requirements: Server–class PC with Pentium processor, CD–ROM drive. _aTitle from label. _aNetwork operating system. _aNetWare (Computer file) _aNetWare (Computer file) _2sears _aComputer networks _xSoftware.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-370.html>PAGE 370</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-371.html>PAGE 371</a></h6><p>Chapter 29 Acquisitions Located within the Cataloging module, Acquisitions lets you create orders for purchasing items for your collection. When creating an order, you can access the Funding Source and Vendor lists so that you can add either to an order. Various Find by" searches allow you to retrieve information on existing orders, no matter what their status. From the Copy Editor in Cataloging you can attach vendor and funding source information to copies.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-372.html>PAGE 372</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Adding or editing an order The on-screen dialog for adding or editing orders is the same. To create a new order, click New from the Acquisitions Orders dialog in Cataloging. To retrieve an existing order, search for it (see page 375), highlight it, and click Edit. Filling out an order To create a new order, complete the information on the four tabs on the Add Order dialog.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-373.html>PAGE 373</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 29 Acquisitions Calculating amounts The Amount tab is used to calculate additional monetary amounts associated with an order. You can enter shipping charges, a discount amount, and your estimated tax. Or, if you know your tax rate, the tax can be calculated accurately by entering a tax percentage and clicking Compute Tax. A default tax rate can be entered in System Setup, but remains editable. Billing and shipping addresses The Address tab contains the information you added in System Setup.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-374.html>PAGE 374</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Adding a line item Clicking Add or Edit in the Line Items box on the Edit Order dialog lets you add or edit individual line items for your order on the Add or Edit Line Item dialog: 1. Enter title information for a new title. Or, if the title is in your database, click Find title, enter a search term and click Find. The fields under Title Details are then filled in with information taken from your MARC record. This way you can easily reorder a title previously cataloged. 2.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-375.html>PAGE 375</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 29 Acquisitions Finding an order There are several ways you can find an existing order: order number (default), vendor, order status, opened date, issued date, and closed date. 1. To use the Find by options, choose one of the Find by methods from the list. 2.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-376.html>PAGE 376</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Receive and Receive All buttons At the bottom of the Line Items dialog are two receiving buttons. These buttons are inactive until you have an Issued order. Once active, you can use these buttons to update either the status of either individual line items by clicking Receive or a whole order by clicking Receive All. What if an item is unavailable? You cannot edit the quantity ordered or delete an item unless the order status is changed back to Open.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-377.html>PAGE 377</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 29 Acquisitions Vendor dialog. Notice that these are the same dialogs you used to establish this information in System Setup. Update vendor information and click Save. For help, see Chapter 4, Setting up Acquisitions." Important: If you add or edit vendor information from an Orders dialog in Acquisitions, you must click Save on both the Add/Edit Vendor dialog and the Order dialog for the changes to be saved.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-378.html>PAGE 378</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 Important: If you add or edit funding source information from an Orders dialog in Acquisitions, you must click Save on both the Add/Edit Funding Source dialog and the Order dialog for the changes to be saved.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-379.html>PAGE 379</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 29 Acquisitions Printing your order form Once you have completed the order, clicking Print sends the information to your printer formatted like a book order.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-380.html>PAGE 380</a></h6><p>Cataloging 04/04 ORDER Page 2 Issued Date: 11/01/2001 Account Number: SKYVW244 Order Number: 4 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Item Number Title Author Publisher Year Material Type Binding Language Edition Details Quantity Price Extended –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– MAG 114 Magic time Andrews, Kristi. Galaxy Press 1987 Sound Recording Clingon 1st Please wrap books separately. 8 $1.00 $8.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-381.html>PAGE 381</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus Chapter 30 Alliance Plus basics This chapter contains a description of Alliance Plus and instructions for starting Alliance Plus. These instructions are also valid for Alliance Plus for Union. About Alliance Plus Alliance Plus lets you add or enhance library bibliographic records with information from Alliance Plus Online, any Alliance Plus CD (MARC, A/V ACCESS, Vintage, or Alliance Plus for Books in Canada), or your union catalog database.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-382.html>PAGE 382</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 From the computer desktop, open the Follett Applications folder and double click the Alliance Plus icon. You can also access the Follett Applications from the Windows Start | Programs menu or from the Mac OS Apple menu. If you are using the password protection option in System Setup to limit access to Cataloging, a password dialog appears. Enter the Cataloging password (by default MODTITLE), and click OK. Note: Cataloging and Alliance Plus share the same password.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-383.html>PAGE 383</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 30 Alliance Plus basics Highlight the Alliance Plus data source you want to use, and then click Select. The Alliance Plus main window appears, showing your choice at the bottom: Note: To perform a Reading Program Recon for Accelerated Reader or Reading Counts!, Alliance Plus Online must be selected. Menu bar Toolbar The status bar displays the selected Alliance Plus data source.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-384.html>PAGE 384</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 leader or fixed-length tags and modify the indicators for the tag currently occupied by the cursor. These options are only available when you are editing a bibliographic record during a Process Misses session. Subfield Contains the commands for adding and deleting subfields from the tag currently occupied by the cursor. These options are only available when you are editing a bibliographic record during a Process Misses session.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-385.html>PAGE 385</a></h6><p>Chapter 31 Autorecon and Reading Program Recon This chapter contains a description of the Autorecon process and instructions for conducting an Autorecon (automated retrospective conversion) and a Reading Program Recon. About the Autorecon process Autorecon enhances the library's bibliographic records with information from Alliance Plus Online or an Alliance Plus CD database.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-386.html>PAGE 386</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 Plus data source and adds any new review sources to the local record. You can use this option to enhance your local full bibliographic records by adding interest and reading levels or to update local records previously processed with an older Alliance Plus data source. Note: Your patrons can use the reading and interest levels to limit the scope of searches conducted with OPAC. See page 470 for more information.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-387.html>PAGE 387</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 31 Autorecon and Reading Program Recon matching data source record. If the library record doesn't contain any reading or interest level information or if the information does not match, Alliance Plus replaces the data in the library records with the information from the data source. If the data source contains different review source information, Alliance Plus adds the new information to the review sources already in the library record.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-388.html>PAGE 388</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 Before starting Autorecon, make sure no one is adding, updating, or importing bibliographic records into the library database. This reduces the likelihood that Alliance Plus will encounter any problems during the process and ensures that the application checks every bibliographic record in the library database. 1. From the Alliance Plus main window, click Autorecon.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-389.html>PAGE 389</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 31 Autorecon and Reading Program Recon If you have not run an Autorecon or completed the last Autorecon, the Select Starting Call Number dialog appears: Type the call number in the text box, and then click Find. The closest match to the call number is highlighted in the selection list. Highlight the desired call number, and then click Select. To jump to the beginning of the selection list, press HOME. To skip to the end of the list, press END. 3.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-390.html>PAGE 390</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 As Alliance Plus processes each bibliographic record, the progress window displays the results of the record comparison. The progress window also keeps track of the number of records processed and missed (not found). The figure displayed in the Records Not Found field represents the bibliographic records Alliance Plus couldn't match during the Autorecon process.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-391.html>PAGE 391</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 31 Autorecon and Reading Program Recon subscription to Alliance Plus Online, the Reading Program option will be disabled. Important: Depending on the size of your database and the available bandwidth of your network, the Reading Program Recon process may take several hours. We suggest you run this process overnight. Note: Unlike Autorecon, if you decide to interrupt the Reading Program Recon process, it will always start at the beginning.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-392.html>PAGE 392</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 1. From the Alliance Plus main window, click Reading Program. 2. Select Upload to upload a quiz file. After the quiz file has been selected, click the Upload button. To upload a new quiz file, select browse. Once the quiz file has been uploaded, click the Close button.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-393.html>PAGE 393</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 31 Autorecon and Reading Program Recon 3. After the quiz file has been uploaded, select the radio button for either Accelerated Reader or Reading Counts. Click Proceed to start the recon. As Alliance Plus processes each bibliographic record, the progress window displays the results of the record comparison. The progress window also keeps track of the number of records processed and missed (not found).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-394.html>PAGE 394</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-395.html>PAGE 395</a></h6><p>Chapter 32 Process Misses This chapter contains a description of Process Misses and instructions for conducting a Process Misses session. About Process Misses Process Misses enhances the brief bibliographic records in the library database with information from an Alliance Plus data source. The difference between this feature and Autorecon is that Process Misses is not automatic.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-396.html>PAGE 396</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 without considering whether the local record has standard numbers. As a result, examining all brief records can be extremely time consuming. Running Process Misses Before starting the Process Misses session, we strongly encourage you to run an Autorecon for all available Alliance Plus data sources. This lets Alliance Plus automatically process as many bibliographic records as possible and reduces the number of records you need to address manually using Process Misses.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-397.html>PAGE 397</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 32 Process Misses 2. Select the option you want to use to process the records missed during Autorecon, and then click Proceed. If you interrupted the last Process Misses session, the Process Misses Restart dialog appears: To restart an interrupted Process Misses session where it left off, click Resume. Go to step 4. To start a new Process Misses session, click New. Go to step 3.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-398.html>PAGE 398</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 3. Type the copy call number you want to start with during the Process Misses session and click Select. The brief record processing options appear: The brief bibliographic record from your library database To skip to the next brief bibliographic record in the library database that matches the selected Process Brief Record Misses option, click Next. The selection list containing the full bibliographic record from the Alliance Plus data source 4.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-399.html>PAGE 399</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 32 Process Misses To search the database for a specific title, click Search by Title. The Title Search dialog appears: Type the desired title and click Search. Alliance Plus highlights the closest matching title in the selection list when searching a CD, and an exact match when searching Alliance Plus Online. The column headings change to match the selected search method. 5.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-400.html>PAGE 400</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 To examine or edit the bibliographic record in the library database, click View. To skip to the next brief bibliographic record in the library database that matches the selected Process Brief Record Misses option, click Next. To replace the brief record in the library database with the highlighted record from the Alliance Plus database, click Replace. To examine or edit the bibliographic record in the Alliance Plus database before copying it into the library database, click View.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-401.html>PAGE 401</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 32 Process Misses Important: If the library has installed Catalog Plus, Alliance Plus deletes the keywords from the records being replaced. However, if you selected the Create Keyword Entries as MARC Records are Saved option in Cataloging setup, Alliance Plus rebuilds the keywords for the replacement record. If this option is not selected, you should run the Update Keywords option in Cataloging after running Process Misses.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-402.html>PAGE 402</a></h6><p>Alliance Plus 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-403.html>PAGE 403</a></h6><p>Search Stations Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations Use the information in this chapter to set up your OPACs. You can choose which interface text or visual to display to your patrons; whether they have access to other applications; and what search and print options are available to them. The setup is applied to the individual search station. This lets you define each station with a unique set of options.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-404.html>PAGE 404</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Many of the setup options depend on which interface, text or visual, or both, you use on your search stations. Each has its own windows and search options: Visual interface Text interface The text interface lets the patron enter a term and choose one of the many indexes in your database to search. Patrons can narrow a search to find items belonging to a reading program or that meet Boolean search criteria, and set limiters on their searches.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-405.html>PAGE 405</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations Choosing the OPAC interface Decide which interface(s) to use. If you have TitlePeek, configure your proxy server. In the Workstation Setup box, you can choose to display the Text OPAC Only, the Visual OPAC Only, or give patrons the option of choosing the interface. Note: If you choose Visual OPAC Only, the only way to access Setup on a Windows computer is by pressing Ctrl + S.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-406.html>PAGE 406</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Enter the address of your proxy server and its port number for this service. Click the Proxies button. Enter the IP address of your proxy server and either accept the default TCP port number of 80 or enter your custom port number. Click Save to close the dialog box. Important: If your patrons can currently access TitlePeek, you do not need to change this proxy configuration.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-407.html>PAGE 407</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations To deter patrons from exiting the OPAC, the following also occurs when you select the Disable access to other applications option: The OPAC launches in full screen mode. On a Macintosh workstation, all other processes stop when the OPAC is launched.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-408.html>PAGE 408</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Button, Key Combination, or Menu Function Windows 95 and 98 Windows NT Mac OS Title bar (right click) Requires password Requires password N/A Windows key Disabled Not modified N/A Note: If you want to further restrict your patrons' access to your system, you may want to purchase third party security software. There are, also, some security features in the Windows operating system that you can set up to restrict access to other applications.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-409.html>PAGE 409</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations Enter the name you want to appear in the Tools menu. Type the path and name of the application's executable file (*.EXE in Windows) or use the Browse button to locate the desired application. 3. After entering an appropriate name in the Description field and identifying the application's path and file name in the Program location field, click OK.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-410.html>PAGE 410</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 interface specific options. If you are using the text interface, continue below. If you are using the visual interface only, go to page 415. Text OPAC Setup tab On the Text OPAC Setup tab are controls that apply only to the text interface: Choosing search options The searching options determine what searches are available at this search station. If you clear a check box, that option is removed from the Search menu and that button from the toolbar.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-411.html>PAGE 411</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations Unless your copies are assigned categories that are meaningful to your patrons, clear the Category check box. If you do not enter Events in System Setup, clear the Events check box. If purchased, select Find-It-All to search free and subscription only informational databases, such as Grolier or Britannica or gain access to over 160,000 safe, high-quality Web sites aligned to both state and national standards.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-412.html>PAGE 412</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 The number of buttons that fit on the toolbar depends on the monitor's desktop area and the size of the buttons. The buttons do not wrap to a second row. If you select more buttons than can be displayed, some of the buttons will not be accessible. The following table lists the number of buttons that can display at each standard monitor resolution.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-413.html>PAGE 413</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations To allow limiting by Publishing year, Reading level, Interest level, or Material types, select the appropriate check boxes. If a check box is cleared, the option is disabled and cannot be set by you or your patrons. Lets patrons customize search limiters, overriding any defaults. To set default ranges for the limiters, click Set defaults and see the following section, Defining default limiter ranges.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-414.html>PAGE 414</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 To limit by publishing year, reading level, or interest level, choose Select and define the desired range. To limit searches by material type, select or clear the check boxes so only the material types you want to include are checked. Remember, the more restrictive you make the limiter options, the longer the response time is for search results. Note: Limiters are ignored in Accelerated Reader, Reading Counts, Lexile, authority, call number, and category searches.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-415.html>PAGE 415</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations Visual OPAC Setup tab On the Visual OPAC Setup tab, you can: choose your home button set; decide whether or not to show hyperlinks in the record display; include annotations in the Bookbag printout; and select the Bookbag Report sort order. You also can access the button configuration dialog from this tab: Click to set up the action buttons (see page 418).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-416.html>PAGE 416</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Note: If you did not select the Disable access to other applications check box on the General Setup tab and your search station is Web enabled, the hyperlinks function. Selecting Bookbag options To include, in the Bookbag printout, annotations (505a, 511a, 520a tags) from the MARC record, select the Print annotations in Bookbag check box. The annotations always appear in the record display window.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-417.html>PAGE 417</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations The table below outlines the default sets. You can see, for example, that, when clicked, the Famous People button loads a set (named Famous People) of buttons named Athletes, Heroes and Heroines, Inventors, and US Presidents. These four buttons, in turn, perform keyword searches on your collection.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-418.html>PAGE 418</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 What's next? If you choose to load the default button set when you click Save, you need go no further. You can use these buttons as is. When you exit Setup, open the visual interface. Check to see that all the searches are productive for your database, and determine your needs for any changes or additions. Important: Make sure that your keyword index is up to date.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-419.html>PAGE 419</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations Click to add an action button to this set. Click to end Configuration Mode and return to Search Mode. Click a button to go back to that set. Click a button to edit it. If the button loads another set of buttons, right click to edit it; left click to load its set. On a Mac, hold down the COMMAND key while clicking to edit it. If you chose to load the default buttons, you see the home button set in the window.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-420.html>PAGE 420</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Note: To edit an action button that loads another set of buttons, you must right click it on a Windows computer. On Mac OS, hold down the COMMAND (open apple) key while clicking it. Otherwise, the set that it loads appears. This image shows the configuration for the Animals button; for a new button, the fields contain the default settings: Delete this action button. Remove any changes you made to this button and return to the main window in Configuration Mode.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-421.html>PAGE 421</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations 2. Give the action button a Description (name). It appears under the button in the main window. When working with buttons, there are a few things to remember: A button and a set can have the same name. A particular button resides in only one set (you could, manually, create a duplicate in another set). A set can contain up to 99 buttons. 3. You can hide the action button by clearing the Active check box.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-422.html>PAGE 422</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Image Property Valid specifications Windows file formats JPEG File Interchange Format (*.jpg), PC Paintbrush (*.pcx), Tagged Image File Format (*.tif), and Windows Bitmap (*.bmp). Mac file formats Graphics Interchange (*.gif), JPEG/JFIF compliant (*.jif, *.jpg, *.jpeg), MacPaint painting (*.mac), Photoshop (R) file (*.psd), PICT (*.pct), Portable Network Graphics (*.png), QuickDraw GX image, QuickTime image file (*.qti), Silicon graphics image (*.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-423.html>PAGE 423</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations You can configure an action button to launch any application that's available to the search station. Enter the path and file name or click the Browse button to locate and select the desired executable file (*.exe). Important: Because the button configurations are shared by all of your search stations, the path and name entered here must be valid at all of them. The platform selection defaults to the workstation type you are now working on.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-424.html>PAGE 424</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Tip: It's easiest to open the desired Web page on your browser, copy the address, and paste it here. Example: Configure a button named NASA to open the NASA Kid's Space Web page by entering http://www.nasa.gov/kids.html. Load Buttons This action causes another set of buttons to display. You can use this action repeatedly to set up a search hierarchy. This allows the patron to move from a broad topic to a specific one, by delving through sets of buttons.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-425.html>PAGE 425</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations any limiters. Please see page 412 for instructions on setting limiters and page 470 for instructions on using them. Examples: Choose Select by Author and set both Starting At and Ending At to Hope, Laura Lee. When the patron clicks this action button, he/she gets a list of all items written by Laura Lee Hope. In System Setup, create a category called Ms. Smith's Summer Reading List. In Cataloging, assign that category to the desired items.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-426.html>PAGE 426</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 provides an explanation and examples of power searches, page 412 has instructions on setting limiters, and page 470, on using them. Wildcards ( ? and * ) can be used in a keyword search. For more information on wildcards, see page 459. Note: Any limiters set up on the Text OPAC Setup tab, or in the text interface's Limiters dialog, have no effect when searching in the visual interface.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-427.html>PAGE 427</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations Saving buttons Clicking Save saves the configuration for this button and returns you to the visual interface main window, still in Configuration mode. The new button appears in its set immediately on your workstation. Important: The button configurations are saved in the FairCom Server database, not, like the setup options, on the local workstation.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-428.html>PAGE 428</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Putting it all together There are many possibilities for configuring buttons and sets. You can create them to support your school's curriculum, draw attention to certain resources, or fill special needs or interests. In the example below, we demonstrate the creation and configuration of buttons to support the research efforts of a class focusing on space exploration. Keep in mind that these are only suggestions.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-429.html>PAGE 429</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 33 Setting up your search stations After saving your setup Since the settings (except the Visual OPAC button configurations) are search station specific, if you need to make changes to the default settings, remember to set up each search station. Setting up multiple search stations You can copy the setup from one search station to another. If all your search stations will be identical but require a lot of changes to the default settings, this can save you some time.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-430.html>PAGE 430</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-431.html>PAGE 431</a></h6><p>Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus After completing the WebCollection Plus installation and connecting it to the FairCom database(s) in the Administrator, you can run WebCollection Plus with its default settings.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-432.html>PAGE 432</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 When the process requiring the exclusive use finishes, click Start Up on the Setup Information page, or Start in the Administrator module.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-433.html>PAGE 433</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus Warning: If you clear the password, it then becomes possible for anyone accessing the Setup Information page to define a new password. Click to open the page. A note about browser settings WebCollection Plus requires a few of the optional settings available in many browsers. In order for your patrons to open and use its Web pages, please make sure that JavaScript, cascading style sheets, and cookies are enabled.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-434.html>PAGE 434</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 The Setup Information page The WebCollection Plus Setup Information page provides numerous options that let you tailor your Web OPAC to accommodate your patrons' needs. Important: Starting with version 5.10, you must enter a password to save any changes on the setup pages. By default, this password is MAKEITSO. To change or eliminate the password, see page 432.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-435.html>PAGE 435</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus WebCollection Plus For English/French or English/Spanish: There are several additional language specific options. See page 454 for more information. For WebCollection Plus for Union You have some additional options for your member sites on the Setup Information page: To access your list of members, enable hold and interlibrary loan email requests and enter their site URLs so that users can check an item's availability (see pages 441 and 445).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-436.html>PAGE 436</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Customizing the appearance of the pages WebCollection Plus lets you personalize some of the text and graphics elements on the home and search pages: Change the background graphics and the logo. Change the text. Changing the text on the main page You can change the text that appears on the first page and on the footer that appears throughout the application. Enter your text changes here. Click to specify your graphics files.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-437.html>PAGE 437</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus want to display this information, clear the Display Site (or Union) Name check box. The Display Announcement option lets you show a short message (up to 100 characters) on the first page. This lets you alert your patrons to important events, such as library or school closings, or to remind them to return checked out items prior to vacations or holidays.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-438.html>PAGE 438</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 To disable this feature, clear the Use Custom Graphics check box on the Setup Information page, enter your password if necessary, and and click Save. Once you do so, the default graphics appear on the pages. So that you can quickly re-enable them, any graphics file names you entered on this Custom Graphics Setup page remain in the text boxes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-439.html>PAGE 439</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus For WebCollection Plus for Union: The Category search option and Visual WebCollection are not available. The Limiters dialog contains a Libraries to be searched" section that allows patrons to select the collections to search the entire union catalog, one of the member catalogs, or a predetermined group of catalogs. To group your member catalogs in Union System Setup, see page 101.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-440.html>PAGE 440</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Setting up hold and interlibrary loan request options The Allow Hold Requests and Allow ILL (InterLibrary Loan) Requests options let your patrons and associated libraries submit requests via email. If you want to allow your patrons to place actual holds and reserves, see the Patron Empowerment section on page 445. Important: Since the request forms are not password protected, unqualified individuals can submit requests.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-441.html>PAGE 441</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus For WebCollection Plus for Union Union catalogs can choose to allow Hold and ILL requests for each member catalog. Click Edit Members in the Member Information box. The Member Information list appears: Click to open the page. Select the check boxes for email requests for each member, and enter their email address. To allow patrons to email requests to the member, select one or both check boxes. Then enter the member's email address.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-442.html>PAGE 442</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Customizing the hold and interlibrary loan request forms Since every library's rules regarding who may request a hold or interlibrary loan vary to some degree, WebCollection Plus lets you edit the instructions that appear on the request forms. The text files for the hold (hold.txt) and interlibrary loan (ill.txt) instructions are located in the POLARIS\WWWROOT\WR\USER\<site name>\ENGLISH folder. You can use any text editor to edit the request forms' instructions.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-443.html>PAGE 443</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus Setting up WebCollection Plus for State Standards If you have a subscription to State Standards, once you've installed or updated your WebCollection Plus, you'll need to configure it for State Standards: 1. Open the WebCollection Plus Setup Information page. (Substitute config" for main" in your WebCollection Plus URL.) Examples: http://192.168.0.1/webopac/config?siteid=smithhs http://www.myserver.edu/webopac/config?siteid=smithhs 2.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-444.html>PAGE 444</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Setting up WebCollection Plus for Keyword/Power and Browse searches If you have a subscription to WebPath Express, once you've installed or updated your WebCollection Plus, you'll need to configure it for WebPath Express: 1. Open the WebCollection Plus Setup Information page. (Substitute config" for main" in your WebCollection Plus URL.) Examples: http://192.168.0.1/webopac/config?siteid=smithhs http://www.myserver.edu/webopac/config?siteid=smithhs 2.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-445.html>PAGE 445</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus Checking a copy's status from WebCollection Plus for Union If any of your union catalog members are running WebCollection Plus, your patrons can find out if a copy is available. Open the Member Information page by clicking Edit Members. On the Member Information page, enter each member's complete URL in their WebCollection URL text box. This places an Availability button next to that member's copies on the Copy Information page.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-446.html>PAGE 446</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 While the Login dialog is almost identical to that in OPAC, the Patron Information page has a different format a list instead of a tabbed dialog: For privacy, only the patron's name and card expiration date appear at the top. Pending, and assessed fines appear. Patrons can check the status of their holds and reserves. Like the Bookbag, clicking the Printer Friendly button produces a black on white text version of the patron information for printing, saving, or mailing.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-447.html>PAGE 447</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus Setting up Visual WebCollection Plus To make the Visual OPAC interface available to your patrons in WebCollection Plus, select the check box for its toolbar button on the Toolbar Setup page (see page 438). Then, on the Setup Information page, you have the same options in WebCollection Plus as in your regular OPAC. Important: To move between the Visual WebCollection button sets, do not use your browser's Back button.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-448.html>PAGE 448</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Providing more information access for your patrons Accessing TitlePeek There are no options on the Setup Information pages for enabling TitlePeek. Once you select the check box that enables TitlePeek on the System Setup | Setup | Cataloging | Misc tab, the TitlePeek button appears on the Title Information page. It appears, however, only when the title's record contains an ISBN and information is available for the title and you have a subscription to TitlePeek.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-449.html>PAGE 449</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus Then, before you leave the Setup Information page, select the Enable QuickLinks check box, enter your password if necessary, and click Save. To disable this feature, clear the Enable QuickLinks check box, enter your password if necessary, and click Save. If this box isn't checked, the drop-down list won't appear. Any links you have set up remain on the QuickLink Setup page.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-450.html>PAGE 450</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 enter your Setup Information page password, and click Save. Make sure to distribute the eBook password to your patrons. Select to allow access only from within your network. Select to allow access from any browser and enter 1 - 10 alphanumeric characters. While a Follett eBook is open, there is an inactivity timeout (currently 15 minutes). If no mouse or keyboard activity is detected in that time, the Follett eBook Web server presents a message to the patron.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-451.html>PAGE 451</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus Post library hours List your policies Provide a map of the library List new additions to your library's collection Incorporate your school's colors or mascot For union catalogs, post the member libraries' hours, policies, or locations Important: There's virtually no limit on what you can do to this page. Do not, however, change the file's name or location.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-452.html>PAGE 452</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Testing your setup After saving your setup information, the main WebCollection Plus Library (or Union) Search page appears. Perform the following checks on the appearance and functionality: 1. On the main search page: If you've added your name, an announcement, or a footer, or customized the graphics, verify that these appear as expected. (See page 436.) The toolbar buttons that you enabled should appear. (See page 438.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-453.html>PAGE 453</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus button appears as desired. If not, return to the Setup Information page to change the settings. Return to the Title Information page and proceed with the next step. (See page 445.) 7. To test the Allow Hold Requests or Allow ILL Requests setup information, click E-mail Request on the Title Information page. The Hold/ILL Request Form appears. Enter your name and email address and click Send.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-454.html>PAGE 454</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 WebCollection Plus for English/French or English/Spanish The dual language versions of WebCollection Plus give your patrons the option of using the application in either language. Once a patron selects a language, it is stored in his browser's cookie file, and is displayed by default whenever the patron visits your WebCollection Plus. Patrons can switch between languages easily.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-455.html>PAGE 455</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 34 Setting up WebCollection Plus Select the default language for your patrons. Enter your institution's name, an announcement, and a custom footer in both languages. The Default Language option determines what language appears by default when a patron accesses your WebCollection Plus for the first time. The selected language appears on the toolbar buttons, the search and results page headings, the help files, and the text on the hold and interlibrary loan email notices.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-456.html>PAGE 456</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Troubleshooting When starting or running WebCollection Plus, error messages may appear in the Windows NT/2000 Event Viewer or in your browser during a search. The following table contains some of the error messages that may appear. Error message Cause/Solution Could not initialize database, error: [error description]. Additional errors when attempting to initialize database. Contact Follett Software Company's Technical Support department. Could not load resource file.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-457.html>PAGE 457</a></h6><p>Chapter 35 Using your OPAC An on line public access catalog (OPAC) lets your patrons search your library's collection quickly and easily. This chapter discusses how to use the different searches, their results, and the tools available in your OPAC. Note: Before your patrons use your OPAC, review Chapter 33, Setting up your search stations," and make any desired changes to the setup. To start OPAC, from the computer desktop, open the Follett Applications folder and double click the OPAC icon.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-458.html>PAGE 458</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 criteria, and set limiters on their searches. The search results are detailed and contain hyperlinks that allow the patron to expand or refine the search. The visual interface is designed for the less experienced patron. Its windows have abbreviated information, a more graphical appearance, easy to use buttons, and larger fonts than the text interface. It incorporates pre configured searches and a simplified type in window.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-459.html>PAGE 459</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC What is a Power search? Power search, an advanced keyword searching tool, allows patrons to search for several words or phrases. Search terms can be from 2 letters (or a single number) up to 40 alphanumeric characters. To access the Power search dialog, select Power from the toolbar or Search menu. Wildcards Wom?n finds woman" and women." Teach* finds teach," teacher," teaches," and teaching." For more information on wildcards, see page 459.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-460.html>PAGE 460</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Boolean search logic In addition to refining their keyword searches by selecting a searchable field for each search term, your patrons can use Boolean operators (AND, OR, BUT NOT) to define the relationship between search terms: cats AND dogs cats dogs You get only titles that mention both cats and dogs. cats OR dogs cats dogs You get all titles that include cats, dogs, or both. cats dogs You get only titles about cats that do not mention dogs.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-461.html>PAGE 461</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC Accelerated Reader search Your patrons can search the database for titles that meet the requirements of the Accelerated Reader program. They can retrieve them if the MARC records have the necessary information in the 526 tag (see page 635). When the patron clicks the AR button, the Accelerated Reader Search appears: Click to open the AR dialog. To narrow the search, select the reading level. Select a point value. Any entries here are also optional.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-462.html>PAGE 462</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 When the patron clicks the Lexile button, the Lexile Search appears: Click to open the Lexile dialog. Enter a Lexile Measure. The search can be narrowed to plus or minus 0, 50, or 100 Lexiles. Any entries here are optional. Your patrons can search the database for titles with Lexile Measures within 0, 50, or 100 measures of a measure they enter. Patrons can also provide up to two keywords to search by.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-463.html>PAGE 463</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC When the patron clicks the RC button, the Reading Counts Search appears: Click to open the RC dialog, or use the Search menu. To narrow the search, select a reading level range, and/or the point value. Any entries here are optional. The patron selects or enters a reading level range, point value range, and, optionally, a subject and/or an author. The patron then clicks Search to produce a list of relevant titles.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-464.html>PAGE 464</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 After every search request, a selection list appears with the closest match highlighted. Selection lists also identify the search type and search term used. To see more about an item, double click it, or highlight it and click Select. Note: If a keyword can't be found, your OPAC returns a subject list highlighting the closest match. Status shows copy availability. If there are no copies for the title, or if Circulation Plus is not installed, the column is blank.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-465.html>PAGE 465</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC Depending on your setup (see page 412), the record appears in full or brief format, but patrons can always switch between the two formats. But this window provides more than title details: To find information that is related to this record, click any hyperlink. This button is dynamic. Click it to switch between brief and full record display. Full vs.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-466.html>PAGE 466</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Electronic Location and Access the 856 tag in action If you include information in the 856 tag (Electronic Location and Access), patrons can access electronic media (e.g., eBooks, CD ROMs, or related Web sites). In full record view, Elec. Access appears after the Notes information. Note: If you choose to disable links to other applications in Setup (see page 406), the Elec. Access information is not hyperlinked. To access electronic media, click the Elec. Access hyperlink.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-467.html>PAGE 467</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC Note: You control whether or not virtual 856 tags display; see the Show Authority 856 tags in OPAC option on System Setup's Cataloging Misc tab (see page 55). For more information on virtual 856 tags, see page 358. eBooks eBooks are electronic versions of printed books. The actual file containing the text can reside anywhere on a floppy disk, the hard drive of a workstation, your library server, or out on the Internet. You can purchase eBooks from several vendors.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-468.html>PAGE 468</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 The other checkout option, Download, allows the patron to download the eBook for reading off line. An application, netLibrary eBook Reader, is needed to read the eBook offline. This software is available on the checkout page for downloading at no charge. Once the Reader is downloaded, it can be used for all Download checkouts at the search station. The option of using the netLibrary eBook Reader is not available for Mac OS.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-469.html>PAGE 469</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC TitlePeek button If your library has a subscription to TitlePeek, you may see a button on the right (next to the Brief/Full button). Clicking this button launches your browser and displays additional information about the title. This may include: cover image, table of contents, publisher's summary, author notes, and journal reviews.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-470.html>PAGE 470</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Printing search results If printing is set up (see page 406), patrons may print their lists of search results, complete title information, and event notices. To print the contents of a window, select Print from the toolbar or File menu. Please note, the Print button and the File |Print option are disabled until a search is initiated. Only the visible portion of lists prints out.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-471.html>PAGE 471</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC To access the Limiters dialog, select Limiters from the toolbar or Tools menu. The Limiters dialog appears with the current limiter settings. Limiters set to All do not restrict searches in any way: Saves the limiter settings Removes all limitations Reading levels can range from 0.1 to 20.0.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-472.html>PAGE 472</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Repeating a search The search history contains a record of the last 14 searches. This allows patrons to quickly repeat a prior search. To access the Search History dialog, choose Tools | Search History: To repeat a search, either double click the search term or highlight it and click Search. The search history does not include searches that did not specify a search term.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-473.html>PAGE 473</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC Patrons with printed barcodes can use a scanner to enter the information. Neither field is case-sensitive; the patron can enter upper- or lower-case letters, regardless of the case used in Patron Maintenance. If you chose Birth Date as the password, the patron must use the MMDDYYYY format. For example, for May 13, 1990, the patron must enter 05131990. The patron should not enter any slashes, dashes, or spaces.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-474.html>PAGE 474</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 patron highlights the desired item and clicks the Hold/Reserve button. If the patron has not yet logged in, the Login Required dialog appears. After a patron logs in successfully, the New Hold/Reserve dialog appears: The OPAC automatically enters the highlighted title into the dialog. To place an any-copy hold, the patron merely clicks Save.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-475.html>PAGE 475</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC Using the Bookbag If allowed in Setup (see page 406), your patrons can collect the titles that interest them, and edit and print or save the list. If allowed in System Setup, they can place holds or reserves on items in the Bookbag.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-476.html>PAGE 476</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Viewing events The Events calendar is a tool for increasing participation in library or school activities, or for offering a bulletin board for community happenings. All events are entered and modified through System Setup (see page 43). Your OPAC's Events calendar is a read only option. For Union Catalog Plus: The events listed are for the union catalog. Member events are not transferred or displayed at the union catalog.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-477.html>PAGE 477</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC Searching your library in the visual interface The visual interface is designed for the less experienced patron. Its windows have abbreviated information, easy to use controls, and a more graphical appearance than the text interface. It incorporates pre configured searches, a simplified type in window, and access to other applications and the Internet.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-478.html>PAGE 478</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 addition, when you pause your mouse pointer over a functioning icon (except action buttons), a tool tip appears, explaining the use of the icon. The hand and the tool tips are not available on Mac OS. Important: Users must use a mouse or touchscreen to navigate in the visual interface. The Tab, arrow, and Enter keys do not function here. Below the toolbar is the home button set (if you chose to load the default buttons in Setup).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-479.html>PAGE 479</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC Tracing your steps As the patron progresses through the visual interface, the Navigation list, on the right side of the window, records the steps: The Home button is always at the top. Click any button to return to that window. At the top is the Home button. Every time the patron moves to another button set, a selection list, or a record display window, a button representing that window is added to the Navigation list in top down order.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-480.html>PAGE 480</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Using the Type In Search Clicking an action button, configured to open the Type In Search, displays this window: Trace your steps in the Navigation list. Enter a search term here. Click to erase the entered term. Then click a search button. Wildcards ( ? and * ) can be used. For more information on wildcards, see page 459. This is a simplified version of the text OPAC main window.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-481.html>PAGE 481</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC Using the search results When the patron clicks a button that is configured to search the collection, or uses the Type In Search window, a selection list of up to 500 results, sorted by title/author, appears: Click to print this portion of the list. View the total number of titles in the selection list. Trace your steps in Navigation. Click a button to see its record display. View the availability. If at least one copy is available, the button shows In.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-482.html>PAGE 482</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Viewing the record Each of the entries in the selection list is an oversize button that, when clicked, opens the record display window. This window includes the material type icon, title, author, call number, and availability, plus the number of pages, annotations (505a, 511a, and 520a tags), and any reading program information (521, 526 tags). The window also displays (if enabled on the Visual OPAC Setup tab) any hyperlinks (856 tags).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-483.html>PAGE 483</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 35 Using your OPAC From the record display window, the patron can print the information for an individual record: Dunlop Elementary 10/13/2000 Title Information Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Title: Jack and the beanstalk Author: Kellogg, Steven. Call Number: E Kel Availability: This title is IN. Size: 28 p.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-484.html>PAGE 484</a></h6><p>Search Stations 04/04 Using the Bookbag From the record display window, the patron can add the item to the Bookbag (if enabled in Setup). The items are listed in order of addition. The Bookbag includes a counter and space for the patron to enter his/her name. It can be accessed from either the text or visual interface. In the visual interface, the Open Bookbag button appears in every window. View the number of entries. Click to print the Bookbag contents. Enter the patron's name.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-485.html>PAGE 485</a></h6><p>Reports Chapter 36 Reports basics This chapter provides a brief overview of Reports. It includes instructions for starting the application and the common tasks associated with generating reports, lists, notices, spine/pocket labels, and patron cards. About Reports Reports lets you use information collected during the daily circulation and cataloging activities to create an assortment of reports, lists, and notices.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-486.html>PAGE 486</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following table contains the reports, lists, labels, and notices included in Reports. For information on specific reports, see Chapter 37, Cataloging reports," and Chapter 38, Circulation reports.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-487.html>PAGE 487</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 36 Reports basics Examples: Common reporting tasks might include: Locating patrons with missing or incomplete addresses by extracting patron data and filtering the address columns for blanks. Determining how many checkouts occur between 3:00 and 4:00 by extracting copy transaction data and analyzing the date and time columns.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-488.html>PAGE 488</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The Reports main window appears: Menu bar Report tabs Report selection list. The contents of the selection list change to reflect the report tab you select. Report option area. The options displayed in this section change to match the report you highlighted on the left.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-489.html>PAGE 489</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 36 Reports basics Generating a report Use the following sections to create any of the reports included with Reports. Selecting a report From the Reports main window, click on the Reports tab containing the desired report. The reports, lists, and notices displayed in the Choose a Report selection list change to reflect the tab you selected. From the Choose a Report selection list, highlight the desired report, list, or notice.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-490.html>PAGE 490</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 A specific search dialog appears for the information in the report range. For example, if the report lets you limit the range of patrons in the report, the Find Patron dialog appears. If you can limit the titles, the Find Title dialog appears. Type your search term in the text box, and then click Find. The closest match to the search term is highlighted in the selection list. Highlight the desired patron or title, and then click Select.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-491.html>PAGE 491</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 36 Reports basics Building a standard number list A few of the Cataloging reports let you limit their contents to specific titles by creating a list of standard numbers (LCCN, ISBN, and ISSN). In these cases, the report options area contains an Edit List button, which is enabled when you select LCCN ISBN ISSN List. To create or edit a standard number list, click Edit List.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-492.html>PAGE 492</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Building a barcode list Some reports let you limit their contents to specific copies or patrons by creating a list of barcodes. These reports include Copy Barcode Labels, Spine/Pocket Labels, and Patron Barcode Labels. In these cases, the report options area contains an Edit List button, which appears when you select the option for Barcode List. To create a barcode list, click Edit List. In the Barcode field, scan the barcode you want to add to the report.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-493.html>PAGE 493</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 36 Reports basics Limiting by patron type, circulation type, or category A few of the Circulation reports let you limit their contents to specific patron types, circulation types, or categories. In these cases, the report options area contains a Patron Types, Circulation Types, or Categories button. To limit the report to a specific patron type, circulation type, or category, click the button.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-494.html>PAGE 494</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Limiting by Union Catalog Plus member In Union Catalog Plus, most of the reports can be limited by member. You can create a report on the entire union catalog database (the default), or limit it to information on one member. On the lower left side of the dialog, click on the Member button. The Select Member dialog appears. Highlight the desired member and click Select. All limiters, including the selected member, are cleared when you choose a new report.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-495.html>PAGE 495</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 36 Reports basics Printing the report After selecting the options for the specific report, you're ready to print. Printing options By selecting the Include Header Page check box, you can print a brief description of the options used to create the report.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-496.html>PAGE 496</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 the saved report, and select the appropriate text file. Reports saves the report to file using a specific page length. As a result, if you use the Print to File option, and then later print the saved report, the report page breaks may not be appropriate for your selected printer. To print the report, click Print. The Print Setup dialog appears. See also: For more information about using the Print Setup dialog, see your operating system's documentation or help.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-497.html>PAGE 497</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 36 Reports basics 2. From Reports, choose the report you want, select the via PHD option, and make any other desired changes to the report options. When you click one of the print options, the Set PHD Connection dialog appears: Select the PHD model you're using. To change the transfer settings, click Edit. These instructions change based on the PHD you choose. Warning: To protect your equipment, make sure you turn off your PHD and computer before connecting or disconnecting the PHD. 3.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-498.html>PAGE 498</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-499.html>PAGE 499</a></h6><p>Chapter 37 Cataloging reports This chapter contains instructions for printing the reports displayed on the Cataloging Reports tab. Cataloging reports overview The Cataloging reports are designed to assist you with maintaining the library collection.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-500.html>PAGE 500</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Cataloging reports (Cont.) Cataloging report Description Copies Without Call Numbers Identifies incomplete copy records. Run this report after adding or updating the copies in the library database (see page 513). Copy Barcode Labels Produces new or replacement copy barcodes in Follett Classic, Code 39, or Codabar symbologies (see page 514). Copy List by Circulation Type Identifies those copies that have been assigned the selected circulation type(s) (see page 516).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-501.html>PAGE 501</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports Cataloging reports (Cont.) Cataloging report Description Titles Without Standard Numbers Identifies incomplete bibliographic records. Run this report before enhancing your records with a retrospective conversion, import, or Alliance Plus Autorecon, or after adding or updating the titles in the library database (see page 534). Used/Unused Copy Barcodes Identifies available or used copy barcodes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-502.html>PAGE 502</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating a Bibliography Report The Bibliography Report lets you create a list of titles based on specialized criteria. Use this report to create a list of titles on specific subjects for use as a reading list or as a tool for promoting certain titles in the library collection. For Union Catalog Plus: Category and Titles via PHD options are not available. Choose the titles for the report: Identify the method to search the database. Select the range of titles.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-503.html>PAGE 503</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports The following is an excerpt from a Bibliography Report: Reports uses the copy call number you entered when you created the copy record (see page 285). Jackson Middle School Library Bibliography Report 10/13/2003 @ 3:28pm Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 591.5 Sec Secrets of animal survival. Washington, D.C. : National Geographic Society, c1983.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-504.html>PAGE 504</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following is an excerpt from a Brief Records Report: Reports retrieves only brief records that have a copy with a call number. To ensure this report contains all brief records, run the Titles Without Copies and the Copies Without Call Numbers Reports.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-505.html>PAGE 505</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports The following is an excerpt from a Code Table List: Jackson Middle School Library 10/13/2003 @ 3:47pm Code Table List Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CODE DESCRIPTION COPIES –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CIRCULATION TYPE *NC Non–circulating eBook R Regular TEM Temporary 58 108 12 For Union Catalog Plus: When <all members> is selected, the call number prefixes for the</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-506.html>PAGE 506</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating a Copies Added Report The Copies Added Report presents a list of copies added in your collection during a selected time period. The report is a good way to generate a list of newly added items to post for your patrons or to report on items purchased and received during a given period of time. For Union Catalog Plus: This report is not available. Type the range of acquisition dates for which you want to generate the report.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-507.html>PAGE 507</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports The following is an excerpt from a Detailed View of the Copies Added Report: Central Columbia M. S. Library 2/13/2004 @ 6:23am Copies Added Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Call Number Title Author Acq. Date Barcode Price –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– FIC ROW Harry Potter and the Order of the Phoenix 9/13/2003 3397600065825B $16.00 Rowling, J. K.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-508.html>PAGE 508</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 vendors. In summary form, you can see your total acquisitions (copies and prices) for each funding source or vendor. For Union Catalog Plus: This report is not available. Identify the type of report you want. Select the content of the report. Limit the report by acquisition date or material type.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-509.html>PAGE 509</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports The Copies by Funding Source or Vendor Report contains the following options: Funding Source or Vendor: Choose the report you want. Report: Choose Copy List or Summary: Select Copy List for a list of your copies grouped by funding source or vendor. Copies within each group are listed in call number order. Each line item in the Copy List includes the call number, title, acquisition date, material type, standard number, barcode, and price of the copy.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-510.html>PAGE 510</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 This excerpt is from a Summary by Vendor (Vendor List) Report: Vendor List –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Vendor Copies Copies Total Price w/o price –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Follett Library Resources 4 0 $309.72 Library Video 3 3 $0.00 Marshall Cavendish 16 5 $809.45 **PBS Video 29 2 $2394.87 8 1 $645.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-511.html>PAGE 511</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports Generating a Copies With Different Call Numbers Report The Copies With Different Call Numbers Report lets you search your collection for copies that may have been assigned an incorrect call number. You can use the report to check the various call numbers assigned to the copies of one title. This can be a handy way to create a call number based bibliography for your patrons to assist them in finding items on the shelf.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-512.html>PAGE 512</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating a Copies With Other Call Numbers Report The Copies With Other Call Numbers Report identifies copies using the Other" (OTH) call number prefix. Circulation Plus uses this prefix to collect circulation statistics on any copy with an unrecognized call number prefix. If you use call number prefixes to organize titles by subject matter, or if you want to collect circulation statistics based on call number prefixes, we recommend correcting these records.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-513.html>PAGE 513</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports Generating a Copies Without Call Numbers Report The Copies Without Call Numbers Report lets you locate incomplete copy records. Copy records without call numbers won't appear on the Shelf List and can't be located during call number searches or processed by the Alliance Plus Autorecon or Process Misses features. Copies without call numbers may also impact circulation statistics.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-514.html>PAGE 514</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Printing Copy Barcode Labels Copy Barcode Labels lets you create new or replacement barcodes for your copies. It prints your full site name (retrieved from System Setup | Site | Identification), the scannable barcode, and the eye readable barcode number. Important: This feature is intended for use on laser, not inkjet, printers. The application takes your barcode symbology from System Setup | Site | Barcodes | Library Materials.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-515.html>PAGE 515</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports If you select Unused Barcodes, press Starting At, and choose either your highest barcode or the last barcode before a gap in your barcode sequence. Then enter the number of barcodes (up to 990) that you want to print. If you select Used Barcodes, press Starting At and Ending At to select the range of barcode numbers that you want. The application prints only the barcode numbers in use within that range; it skips any unused barcode numbers.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-516.html>PAGE 516</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 printers. In addition, the type of scanner and the maximum width of its laser beam affect its ability to read the barcodes. Generating a Copy List by Circulation Type The Copy List by Circulation Type identifies copies that have a particular circulation type (or types) assigned to them. Run this report for assistance when removing or changing circulation types or loan periods. To select the circulation type(s) for the report, highlight one or more in the list.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-517.html>PAGE 517</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports The following is an excerpt from a Copy List by Circulation Type Report: Jackson Middle School Library 10/13/2003 @ 3:49pm Copy List by Circulation Type Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Circulation Type Call Number Title Barcode –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Overnight 520 MIT 940.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-518.html>PAGE 518</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 To create a meaningful Headings Without Authorities Report, your database must already contain both bibliographic and authority records. For Union Catalog Plus: This report is not available. Choose the records you want to examine: Identify the method to search the database. Then, select the range. Choose the type(s) of headings you want to examine. To limit the report to a list of headings, choose Summary only. To include the titles, choose Include titles.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-519.html>PAGE 519</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports Include titles: This detailed report includes, for each heading, a list of the titles in your bibliographic records that do not have the corresponding authority records. After selecting your report options, click Print. See also: For a detailed explanation of the printing process, see Printing the report" starting on page 495.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-520.html>PAGE 520</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating a Lexile Report The Lexile Report allows you to specify a range of Lexile measures and generate a list of copies that fall within that range. You can also search for items in the Beginning Reader (BR) and Non Prose (NP) categories, which do not have numeric Lexile measures. Reports can be sorted by title, author, call number, or Lexile measure. Select the range of Lexile measures for the report. Choose the sort order of the report. The default is by Lexile Measure.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-521.html>PAGE 521</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports Generating a Shelf List The Shelf List presents the copies in your library collection in the order they should appear on the library shelves (call number, author, and title). If you want to use this list to compare against the results of an inventory, we suggest you run it before starting the inventory process. Select the range of call numbers you want to include in the report.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-522.html>PAGE 522</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating Spine/Pocket Labels Spine/Pocket Labels lets you print labels based on a range of call numbers, barcodes, or acquisition dates. You can also print labels based on a list of barcodes or standard numbers. The labels display a copy's call number and any copy or volume numbers included in the copy record. For Union Catalog Plus: If you choose Select by Barcode, you must also choose a member from the Member list. Barcode List and Standard Number List options are not available.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-523.html>PAGE 523</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports begin. Reports counts labels from left to right, then top to bottom. For example, to start printing on the first label of the second row of 8 across, 6 down" label stock, set Starting Label to 9. Offsets: Use these options to fine-tune the alignment. The horizontal and vertical offsets let you adjust the left and top margins, respectively. Each increment is equal to 1/10th of a millimeter. The offsets for each template vary from printer to printer.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-524.html>PAGE 524</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Important: The horizontal/vertical offsets aren't applied or saved when you choose Print Preview or Print to File. If you print spine/pocket labels from a preview window or saved file, the labels won't be positioned correctly. Important: Before you print from a Mac OS workstation, you must also select File | Page Setup and choose the 8.5" x 11" paper with the smallest margins (approximately .17" left/right and .11" top/bottom).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-525.html>PAGE 525</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports The following is a sample of spine and pocket labels by call number, created with the OCLC 4" template: Reports uses the copy call number you entered when you created the copy record. 599.744 Sau 599.744 Sau 599.8 Pat 599.8 Pat Saunier, Nadine. The panda. Patterson, Francine. Koko’s kitten. 599.744 Sau 599.8 Pat Saunier, Nadine. The panda. Patterson, Francine. Koko’s kitten.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-526.html>PAGE 526</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 For Union Catalog Plus: Titles via PHD is not available. On any of the other choices, if you check the Show Copies check box, the report includes a Member column to identify the owner of each copy. Select the titles for the report. To include the copies for each of the titles, check Show Copies. To include the categories assigned to each copy, check Show Categories. The Title List contains the following options: Titles: Select the method for searching the database.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-527.html>PAGE 527</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports The following is an excerpt from a Title List based on Title: Displays the item's material type. Reports retrieves this information from the title's MARC record Leader tag (see page 268).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-528.html>PAGE 528</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following is an excerpt from a Title List based on Standard Number: Jackson Middle School Library 10/13/2003 @ 1:23pm Title List from LCCN/ISBN/ISSN List Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– LCCN/ISBN/ISSN Title Author LCCN/ISBN/ISSN Type Call Number Barcode Price Circ Type Category Category –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 83006566 /AC Love & rivalry : three exce Faber, Doris, 1924– 920 F</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-529.html>PAGE 529</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports Generating a Titles Added/Updated Report The Titles Added/Updated Report presents a list of titles that were added or updated and copies added in your collection during a selected time period. The report is a good way to generate a list of newly added items for a report on items purchased and received during a given period of time. This report is also useful in monitoring how long it takes to enter title information for time management purposes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-530.html>PAGE 530</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following is an excerpt from a Titles Added/Updated Report: The date and time the report was generated Jackson Middle School Library The date and time the titles/ copies were added/updated 10/13/2003 @ 1:24pm Titles Added/Updated Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Date Added/Updated Time Title LCCN/ISBN/ISSN Type –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 10/13/2003 Added 2:48PM Cult of the Ha</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-531.html>PAGE 531</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports To include copy information for each of the titles, check Show Copies. To include all the copy categories assigned to these copies, check Show Categories. This option isn't available unless you first select the Show Copies check box. After selecting your report options, click Print. See also: For a detailed explanation of the printing process, see Printing the report" starting on page 495.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-532.html>PAGE 532</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 move all the copies for that title to a single bibliographic record. This makes it easier to find all the copies for that title. Select the check box for each standard number you want to include in the report. After selecting your report options, click Print. See also: For a detailed explanation of the printing process, see Printing the report" starting on page 495.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-533.html>PAGE 533</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports Generating a Titles Without Copies Report The Titles Without Copies Report lets you identify bibliographic records for weeding or locate incorrectly cataloged records. Run this report before updating the library database, after adding or enhancing your bibliographic records, or before running the Global Delete Titles Without Copies process. Select the range of titles for the report.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-534.html>PAGE 534</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The Titles Without Copies Report contains the following information: Reports retrieves the default call number from the location specified in System Setup (see page 47). Displays the item's material type. Reports retrieves this information from the title's MARC record Leader tag (see page 268).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-535.html>PAGE 535</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 37 Cataloging reports The following is an excerpt from a Titles Without Standard Numbers Report: Reports retrieves the default call number from the copy or, if there is no copy, from the location specified in System Setup (see page 47).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-536.html>PAGE 536</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following are excerpts from Used/Unused Copy Barcodes Reports: Displays the barcode symbology defined for library materials in System Setup (see page 37). If you picked Used barcode numbers from the Select drop down list, the report displays consecutive barcodes as a range of barcodes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-537.html>PAGE 537</a></h6><p>Chapter 38 Circulation reports The chapter contains instructions for generating the reports displayed on the Circulation Reports tab. Note: If haven't installed Circulation Plus, you can't access circulation reports. Circulation reports overview The circulation reports are designed to help with collection development and support your circulation activities. They include reports for analyzing transactions and holds, overdues and fines lists, and patron notices.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-538.html>PAGE 538</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Circulation report Description Copy List by Status Presents the copies in your collection based on each item's copy status. Use this report to identify your copies based on any copy status (Available, Checked Out, On Loan, At The Bindery, Missing, On Hold, or Lost) (see page 551). Date Slips Prepares date due slips for your patrons. Choose a date or sort by loan periods set up for each patron type (see page 552).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-539.html>PAGE 539</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports Circulation report Description Patron Statistics Presents your circulation statistics in summary or detailed form by Patron Type, Location, and user-defined fields. This report also includes the circulation statistics collected since you installed Circulation Plus. Use this report to monitor changes in transaction activity resulting from new reading programs or motivational presentations (see page 577).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-540.html>PAGE 540</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following is an excerpt from a Category Statistics Report generated for this month's circulations: Jackson School Library 10/3/2003 @ 1:29pm Category Statistics Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CODE DESCRIPTION Total Circs Monthly Circs Collection –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 5 Art 13 ( 15.1%) 13 ( 61.9%) 13 ( 0.8%) 6 Careers 0 ( 0.0%) 0 ( 0.0%) 4 ( 0.2%) 7 Geography 0 ( 0.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-541.html>PAGE 541</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports Patrons: Select the method for searching the library database. Then select the range of patrons for the report. For instructions on selecting the starting and ending records, see page 489. Note: Location and User Fields are customizable patron record prompts. For additional information on changing these prompts, see page 72. To limit the report to patrons belonging to specific patron types, click Patron Types (see page 493).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-542.html>PAGE 542</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following are excerpts from Checkouts/Fines Transactions Reports: In this first example, the user decided to select the Fines Only option. As a result, assessed fines for items already checked in, lost, or damaged, or user-defined, are included in the report (see Chapter 11, Dealing with fines and lost copies"). Displays the date you created the fine.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-543.html>PAGE 543</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports Select the copies for the report. Limit the report to certain copies. Include the categories assigned to each copy in the report. The Circulation Statistics Report has these options: Copies: Select the method for sorting the statistics in the report. Title List Order allows you to select a range of titles and prints in title order. Shelf List Order allows you to select a range of call numbers and prints in call number order.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-544.html>PAGE 544</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Select a category from one or both lists. These lists display all the categories created in System Setup and the number of copies assigned to each. If you select two categories, use a Boolean operator to define the relationship between them: And: Limits the report to only those titles belonging to both categories. Or: Includes those titles that belong to either category. Not: Limits the report to those titles in the upper category that are not also in the lower category.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-545.html>PAGE 545</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports The following Circulation Statistics Report excerpt is in Shelf List Order: Jackson School Library 10/3/2003 @ 1:43PM Circulation Statistics – Shelf List Order Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Call Number Barcode Title Price TDY MTH YTD LYR TOTAL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 473.21 Will Latin dictionary $12.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-546.html>PAGE 546</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 10's 100's Lists statistics for each group of 10 (000-009, 010-019, and so on). Lists statistics for each group of 100 (000-099, 100-199, and so on). Call Number Prefixes: Check the box to include statistics for copies that have call number prefixes (for example, FIC or REF). If you do not, the report is limited to copies with Dewey call numbers ( your non-fiction materials). See also: Page 48, for information on updating your list of call number prefixes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-547.html>PAGE 547</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports Generating a Collection Age by Subject Report The Collection Age by Subject Report lets you examine your collection's age and circulation statistics based on a range of subjects. By reviewing this report, you can see which areas in your collection need weeding or enhancement. Select the range of subjects for the report. For instructions on setting starting and ending records, see Defining a range" on page 489. After selecting your report options, click Print.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-548.html>PAGE 548</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating a Collection Statistics Report The Collection Statistics Report lets you examine the circulation statistics for the current day, month, or the previous year. This report also includes the statistics for the current year as well as the statistics accumulated since you installed Circulation Plus. Use this report to identify low circulation areas in the library collection in need of weeding, promotion, or enhancement.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-549.html>PAGE 549</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports The following are excerpts from the Collection Statistics Report for monthly statistics, statistics from the previous year, and daily statistics: Lists the number of this year's circulations attributed to copies in the call number range or prefix and the percentage of the current year's circulations represented by these figures. Lists the number of copies in the specific call number range or prefix and the corresponding percentage of the library collection.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-550.html>PAGE 550</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating a Collection Value Report The Collection Value Report lets you examine your collection's value as a whole and by call number range. Reports calculates these values using the prices in copy records. Since some copy records may not contain a price, Reports also provides you with an estimated value. The estimated value is based on an average of the prices in that call number range.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-551.html>PAGE 551</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports The following is an excerpt from a Collection Value Report: Lists the number of copies with prices in the call number range or prefix and the percentage of the range or prefix they represent. Lists the estimated value of the call number range or prefix. The estimated value is based on an average of the values of copies that have prices.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-552.html>PAGE 552</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following is an excerpt from a Copy List by Status: Reports only includes the date the copy was last checked out if you selected Lost or Checked Out from the Copy Status drop down list.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-553.html>PAGE 553</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports Generating Hold Notices Use Hold Notices to notify your patrons when copies are ready for pickup. Notices print for both ready holds and ready reserves. When a copy that satisfies a hold is checked in, Circulation Desk changes the hold status on the copy from Pending to Ready. When a pre-reserve processing date arrives, the hold status of the reserve becomes Ready if the copy is available (Pending if it is not).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-554.html>PAGE 554</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 in it or create a new template in System Setup | Setup | Circulation | Notices. For more information, see page 82. After selecting your report options, click Print. The following is a sample Hold Notice in the internal distribution style: Reports uses the salutation you defined for the patron's assigned patron type (see page 71).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-555.html>PAGE 555</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports The following Hold Notice was created using the mailing distribution style: Jackson School Library 10/3/2003 @ 4:00pm Hold Notice Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Dear Richard Grayson: Graduation Year: 2006 The items you requested are now available in the library. Please bring this notice to the library as soon as possible.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-556.html>PAGE 556</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating a Hold Statistics Report The Hold Statistics Report lets you examine the number of holds and reserves that were placed on selected titles. This report is useful for identifying materials in high demand by your patrons or for collection development purposes. Note: If you want to calculate hold or reserve statistics as of a particular date, use the Set Report Date feature to override the current system date. For more information about changing the report date, see page 494.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-557.html>PAGE 557</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports Generating a Hold Transactions Report The Hold Transactions Report lets you examine the patron, title and copy, and status of each hold and reserve in the library database. This report is ideal if you post the hold information for your library staff. Sorted by call number, it functions as a pick list for retrieving reserves or checking the hold shelf. Select the range of titles, patrons, or call numbers for the list. Choose to include holds, reserves, or both.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-558.html>PAGE 558</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following is an excerpt from a Hold Transactions Report in call number order: Jackson School Library 10/3/2003 @ 4:13pm Holds By Call Number Transaction List Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Call Number Title Author Barcode Status Reserve Period Expires Patron Name Patron Barcode Notified –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 611 Gra Anatomy, descriptive and surgical Gray, Henry, 1825–1861</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-559.html>PAGE 559</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports The following is an excerpt from an Inventory List by Call Number: Displays the inventory status used to generate the report. Jackson Middle School Library 10/3/2003 @ 4:17pm Inventory by Call Number: Marked Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Call Number Barcode Price Circ Type Last Date Title –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 003.3 T 21063 18.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-560.html>PAGE 560</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 To limit the categories used to generate the report, click Categories. The Categories dialog appears: The selection list contains all categories created in System Setup and the number of copies assigned to each. For instructions on adding or removing categories, see Increasing access to your collection with categories" on page 52. If you want to limit the list to copies with specific categories, click Selected Categories, and then highlight each category you want to include.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-561.html>PAGE 561</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports Generating Overdue/Bill Notices Use Overdue/Bill Notices to notify your patrons of overdue materials or outstanding fines. You can generate these notices in batches based on selected patron criteria. You can further limit the notices to items belonging to specific circulation types. To generate notices as of a particular date, use the Set Report Date feature to override the current system date. From the Reports menu bar, select Options | Set Report Date.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-562.html>PAGE 562</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Note: Regardless of the date range, this option does not include items not currently overdue. To include items that are not yet overdue, you'll need to run the report as of a future date. For information on changing the report date, see page 494. Show All Assessed Fines: Includes outstanding assessed fines for overdue, damaged, and lost items, any user-defined fines, and refunds. Otherwise, the notices list only currently overdue materials.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-563.html>PAGE 563</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports These samples of Overdue/Bill Notices are in the Internal format (2 per page): Reports uses the salutation you defined for the patron's assigned patron type (see page 71). Jackson School Library 10/01/2003 @ 4:20pm Overdue/Bill Notices Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Homeroom : 406 Library period : 4th Grad: 2006 Barcode: P 29487 Dear Brad Majors: The following items are overdue.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-564.html>PAGE 564</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following Overdue/Bill Notice was created using the Internal (1 per page) distribution format with Show All Assessed Fines and Show Price for Overdues selected: Jackson School Library 11/3/2003 @ 4:20pm Overdue/Bill Notices Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Homeroom : Bettiscombe Library period : 6th Grad: 2009 Barcode: 1929 Dear Penelope Hobhouse: The following items are overdue. Please return them as soon as possible.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-565.html>PAGE 565</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports The following Overdue/Bill Notice was created using the Mailing (1 per page) distribution format, including To the parents/guardians of" above the patron name: Jackson School Library 10/3/2003 @ 4:20pm Overdue/Bill Notices Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– To the Parents of: Frank L. Wright: Graduation Year: 2006 The following items are overdue. Please return them as soon as possible.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-566.html>PAGE 566</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating an Overdue List The Overdue List provides you with a simple list of patrons with overdue copies. If you need to check to see if the materials are on the shelf before you issue Overdue Notices, you can print this list in Shelf List order. Select the method for generating the report - either by Shelf List, Patron Name, or user/location fields. Select the limiters for the report. If printing by Shelf List, Due Date is the only available limiter.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-567.html>PAGE 567</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports The following is an excerpt from the Overdue List printed by Shelf List: Central Columbia M. S. Library 2/19/2004 @ 6:33am Overdue List Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Call Number Title Barcode Due Date –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 796.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-568.html>PAGE 568</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Important: If Circulation Plus is installed on a server and not on your workstation, you or your technician must install the barcode fonts to your workstation before printing barcodes. To do so, insert our product installation disk into your CD drive, select the Workstation tab, highlight Barcode Fonts for Reports, and click Install. For a Mac OS workstation, run the Workstation Installer, and select the Barcode Fonts check box.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-569.html>PAGE 569</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports University Products, Inc., product # 9-62450-16 (1-800-628-1912, http://www.librarysuppliers.com). The label stock has 30 labels per sheet, 3 across and 10 down. Each label is 2 5/8" by 1". Starting Label: To start printing on other than the first label on the sheet, set this to the correct position. Reports counts labels from left to right/top to bottom. For example, to start printing on the first label of the third row, set Starting Label to 7.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-570.html>PAGE 570</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating a Patron Barcode List The Patron Barcode List lets you create a list of patron names and barcodes for easy scanning of patrons at the Circulation Desk. Barcode lists can be alphabetic by patron, a group of patrons selected via a PHD, or by a group as determined by location or user fields. Important: This feature is intended for use on laser, not inkjet, printers.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-571.html>PAGE 571</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports For patrons with a specific status, select the one you want. For patrons with certain graduation years or library card expiration dates, select the Only Patrons With check box, choose Graduation Year or Card Expiration Date, and enter the desired range of years. Page Breaks: Select the check box to start a new page after each group in the report. Groups are determined by the criterion you selected in the Select By list.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-572.html>PAGE 572</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating Patron Cards Patron Cards lets you print several kinds of patron cards: Rolodex/rotary cards to be kept at the circulation desk; ID cards to be carried by the patrons; and 3" x 5" cards to be kept in a file drawer. The information on the patron card varies according to the template selected. See the table on page 574 for specifics. Select the range of patrons for the card printing. Determine your card stock settings. Choose to include pictures or scannable barcodes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-573.html>PAGE 573</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports 573 If you select the Avery Patron ID Card (05361) template, select the Print Patron Pictures check box if you have pictures in your patron records and you want them on the cards. To include a scannable barcode on the card, select the Print Barcodes check box and then the Barcode or ID field. If you choose ID, the scannable barcodes include the forward slash (/) so that you can scan them in Circulation Desk.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-574.html>PAGE 574</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Template Horizontal Offset* Vertical Offset* Lines per card Chars per line Pinfeed Cont. Rolodex Card ** 2 1/6" by 4" (Follett product no. 75031) 80 NA 45 8 * Estimates only. Actual horizontal and vertical offsets vary from printer to printer. ** The pinfeed label templates are not available on Mac OS. Stock for the templates supported by Patron Cards is available from the following vendors: Follett Software Company (1-800-323-3397); Avery (1-800-462-8379, http://www.avery.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-575.html>PAGE 575</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports The following is a sample of an Avery Small Rotary 2.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-576.html>PAGE 576</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Select the range of patrons for the list. Limit the list to certain patrons. Start a new page after each group. After selecting your report options, click Print. The Patron Name List has these options: Patrons: Select the method for searching the library database. Then select the range of patrons for the report. For instructions on selecting the starting and ending records, see page 489. Note: Location and User Fields are customizable patron record prompts.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-577.html>PAGE 577</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports The following is an excerpt from a Patron Name List: Jackson School Library 10/3/2003 @ 4:41pm Patron Name List Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Homeroom Patron Name Barcode ID Patron Status Exp Date Grad YR Type –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– B–014 Abright, Jessica P 1 874–733–2121 Active 6/1/2005 2005 S Generating a Patron Statistics Report The Patron Statistics Repo</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-578.html>PAGE 578</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following is an excerpt from the Patron Statistics Report using the summary format: Jackson School Library 10/3/2004 @ 4:43pm Patron Circulation Statistics Page 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Patron Type Homeroom Monthly Yearly Last Year Total Patrons –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Student Homeroom Granger 1 ( 8%) 10 ( 11%) 22 ( 21%) 50 ( 22%) 10 Homeroom Smith 6 ( 46%) 31 ( 3</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-579.html>PAGE 579</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 38 Circulation reports Generating a Used or Unused Patron Barcodes Report The Used/Unused Patron Barcodes Report lets you create a list of patron barcode numbers that are already assigned to patrons or that are available for reassignment. Give a copy of this list to your staff before they enter new patrons into the library database. Pick the type of patron barcodes you want listed in the report. Enter the range for used barcodes. Enter the starting number and quantity for unused barcodes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-580.html>PAGE 580</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 The following are excerpts from Used/Unused Patron Barcodes Reports: Displays the barcode symbology defined for patrons in System Setup (see page 37).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-581.html>PAGE 581</a></h6><p>Chapter 39 System reports This chapter contains information about two reports that contain information about your system: System Circulation Statistics and System Information. Unlike all other reports which are available only in the Reports module, these system reports are accessible from five other modules as well: Cataloging; Circulation Desk; Inventory; Patron Maintenance; and System Setup.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-582.html>PAGE 582</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Generating your System Circulation Statistics To view your circulation statistics, click the Statistics button. The System Circulation Statistics dialog appears. This window displays the number of circulations and holds placed during a given time period for your library: List includes Years, Months, Days, and Hours. Acceptable values are 1-90. Updates the current data with the system's circulation statis tics for the selected period. Prints directly to you printer.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-583.html>PAGE 583</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 39 System reports The contents of the Servers.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-584.html>PAGE 584</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Note: If you need to contact Follett Technical Support for assistance at any time, please have this report on-screen or printed out. More information for union catalogs and members If yours is a union catalog, your report omits circulation and inventory statistics, and barcode, PHD, and patron information. It adds, however, data exchange information about the union catalog and each member.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-585.html>PAGE 585</a></h6><p>Chapter 40 Extracting data This chapter contains general information on extracting data; instructions on how to extract data; suggestions for using the data; and a table of the fields included in the extraction files. About extracting data Extract Data allows you to retrieve information from your database without using our Reports module.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-586.html>PAGE 586</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Click to select a call number range for copies/titles. Enter a date range for transactions. Click to select the field and choose the range for patron data. Click to select or enter the destination file. When you click Extract, a progress window appears. When the extraction is complete, the Cancel button changes to Close. If you interrupt this process by clicking the Cancel button, no extract file is created.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-587.html>PAGE 587</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 40 Extracting data Excel imports the file, placing each field in a column with the field name in the first row: To edit the extraction file easily . . . . . . import it into a spreadsheet program. You can delete, rearrange, sort, and filter the rows or columns. You can run the Find feature to locate specific certain data, or, in combination with Replace, update it.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-588.html>PAGE 588</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 On the spreadsheet, locate the button named Import <data type> file. Click the button and enter the path and filename of your data extraction file. Use your data extraction file of: With this spreadsheet file: Copies/Titles NonfictionDetails.xls Copy Transactions Monthly Transactions.xls Category Transactions Category Transactions.xls Patrons Patron Graduation.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-589.html>PAGE 589</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 40 Extracting data 589 The following table contains the names of the fields in the four extraction files: Copies/Titles Copy Transactions Category Transactions Patrons (Copy) Barcode Call Number Title Author LCCN ISBN ISSN Material Type Publication Date Copy Status Inventory Status Sub location Acquisition Date Price Description 1 Enumeration 1 Description 2 Enumeration 2 Description 3 Enumeration 3 Copy Number Funding Source Vendor Circulation Type Code Circulation Type Description Cir</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-590.html>PAGE 590</a></h6><p>Reports 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-591.html>PAGE 591</a></h6><p>Utilities Chapter 41 Database maintenance utilities This chapter contains instructions on how to start Utilities, information on the different functions included in Utilities, tips on when to run them, and what to do if a utility is interrupted. A description of the Registered Products feature and common exception report messages are also included. About Utilities Utilities contains a collection of functions designed to diagnose and address problems in the library database.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-592.html>PAGE 592</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 What if a utility is interrupted? If a utility is abnormally interrupted, by power loss or by someone rebooting the computer for example, the next time you try to access any other FSC application, an error message appears. This message directs you to run the interrupted utility before attempting to run any other application. You cannot proceed without running the indicated utility.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-593.html>PAGE 593</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 41 Database maintenance utilities The Utilities main window appears: Menu bar From the menu bar, you can access each of the utilities, as well as the help topics. File Maintenance Diagnostic and index rebuilding utilities. For instructions on running these utilities, see About the Maintenance utilities" on page 593. Advanced Utilities designed to repair database problems. For instructions on running these utilities, see About the Advanced utilities" on page 598.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-594.html>PAGE 594</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 The following table briefly describes each utility and lists some of the reasons for running them: Maintenance utility Description Check Database Integrity Rebuilds the file indexes, examines the library database, and diagnoses any problems it encounters. After the utility is finished, it records all findings and recommendations in an exception report. Use this utility if you experience any database problems or receive any critical error messages.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-595.html>PAGE 595</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 41 Database maintenance utilities Rebuild Keywords Each time the Rebuild Keywords utility runs, it empties the keyword index and then rebuilds it for the entire library database. Depending on the size of the library database, this can take a long time to finish.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-596.html>PAGE 596</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 Rebuild MARC Headings The Rebuild MARC Headings utility re creates the headings used to locate bibliographic, authority, and copy records during searches. Each heading corresponds to a type of search.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-597.html>PAGE 597</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 41 Database maintenance utilities 2. To rebuild all the headings in the library database, select Rebuild All MARC Headings. If you want to limit the rebuild process to a few areas, choose Rebuild Selected MARC Headings, and select the headings you want. Important: Once the headings rebuild process begins, you cannot interrupt it. 3. To start the rebuild process, click Rebuild. A message appears, informing you that this utility may take a long time and asking you to confirm the command.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-598.html>PAGE 598</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 indexes, choose Rebuild Selected File Indexes, and then select the file indexes you want to rebuild. Important: Once the file index rebuild process begins, you cannot interrupt it. 3. To start the rebuild process, click Rebuild. A message appears, warning that you cannot stop the process once it begins and asking you to confirm the command. Click Yes to proceed. A progress dialog appears, describing each step of the procedure.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-599.html>PAGE 599</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 41 Database maintenance utilities Advanced utility Description Empty Database Deletes the contents from the library database, including all authority, bibliographic and patron records, copies, key words, indexes, and setup information. Enable Data Exchange/ Disable Data Exchange Starts or stops the automatic data exchange between a union and a member.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-600.html>PAGE 600</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 MARC Database Deletes and re creates the indexes and MARC headings, and corrects any problems it encounters. You also have the option of rebuilding the keyword and cross reference (authority) indexes. Important: The MARC Database option automatically deletes the keyword and cross reference indexes. If you select the MARC Database check box but don't rebuild keywords or cross references, you cannot conduct keyword searches or examine cross references during database searches.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-601.html>PAGE 601</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 41 Database maintenance utilities 1. To start the Reload File utility, select Reload File from the Advanced menu. The Reload File dialog appears: 2. From the Select Database Files list, choose the desired files and click Reload. A message appears, informing you that this utility may take a long time and asking you to confirm the command. Click Yes to continue. A progress dialog appears when the process begins, describing each step in the process.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-602.html>PAGE 602</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 Warning: Performing this operation will remove all patron statistics. Once the Remove Patron History process begins, the changes cannot be undone. Empty Database The Empty Database utility erases the entire database, including bibliographic and authority records, copies, keywords, indexes, setup information, and patrons. Warning: The Empty Database utility deletes all information from the database, including MARC records, copies, and patrons. The deletion cannot be undone.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-603.html>PAGE 603</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 41 Database maintenance utilities Viewing your registered products To view a list of the Follett Software Company products installed on the library computer system, select Registered Products from the Help menu. Closes the Registered Products dialog Important: If a product you installed is missing from this list, or if a listed product should not be on the list, please call Follett Software Company's Technical Support department.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-604.html>PAGE 604</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 The following image contains a sample exception report: Check Database Integrity 10/13/2000 @ 01:58 pm Step 1 of 3 : Rebuild Indexes Acceptable Records: 0 Invalid Records: 0 Total Files: 21 Files Processed: 21 File: MARC Header Step 1 of 3 : COMPLETED Step 2 of 3 : Check MARC Integrity File: Authority Data Total Records: 0 Acceptable Records: 0 Invalid Records: 0 File: Bibliographic Data Total Records: 122 Acceptable Records: 122 Invalid Records: 0 File: Synchronization Total R</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-605.html>PAGE 605</a></h6><p>Chapter 42 Backing up your database This chapter provides information for developing an effective backup and recovery strategy and instructions for using Follett Software's Backup and Restore application. Develop a backup strategy If you ever need to recover from damaged data, you must have a recovery plan in place before the problem occurs. Backing up your data on a regular basis is the simplest and most effective plan for data recovery.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-606.html>PAGE 606</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 can choose to back up specific directories and files or all the files and directories on the server. As each vendor uses different terminology to define the backup types, you'll need to refer to the vendor's documentation for definitions and instructions. For information about backing up your Follett applications with third party software, see the instructions beginning on page 610. Media rotation One key element of any data recovery plan is the rotation of your backup media.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-607.html>PAGE 607</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 42 Backing up your database Using Follett Software's Backup and Restore Follett recommends that you back up your Circulation Plus/Catalog Plus database on a daily basis. This ensures that all daily transactions, configuration, and setup for the Follett applications are preserved should you need to restore. If you have just upgraded from an earlier version of the application, make sure you perform a backup of your data.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-608.html>PAGE 608</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 Backing up your database Before you back up your database, depending on the media you're using, there are one or two things you can do to help the process run smoothly: If you're backing up to floppy disks, make certain that you have enough formatted, high density diskettes on hand. If you're rotating disk sets (see page 606), the backup process lets you overwrite a previous backup file; however, it does not erase any other files on the disks.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-609.html>PAGE 609</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 42 Backing up your database When you click Backup, if the application detects another backup file at your selected destination, a message with a description of the existing file appears. If you want to overwrite the existing file, click Yes. If you're rotating disk sets (see page 606), make certain that you don't overwrite your most recent backup. Unless you used floppy disks, a message appears when the backup is complete, asking if you would like to verify your backup.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-610.html>PAGE 610</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 Note: If you're restoring from floppy disks, insert the first disk of the backup set, and then click Browse and select your floppy drive. You'll be prompted to insert each disk in the set as it's needed. The application also alerts you if you select a backup file with a site name that is different than the site you're restoring. Click Yes only if you're certain that you want to use the file. When you click Restore, the application first verifies that the backup file is complete.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-611.html>PAGE 611</a></h6><p>04/04 Chapter 42 Backing up your database Multiuser sites Sites running Follett's multiuser applications should back up the DATA directory and its subdirectories. The default path is FAIRCOM\DATA. To back up the DATA directory successfully with third party software, you must do one of the following: Prior to backup, close all your Follett applications, then stop the FairCom database server as described in the Installation Guide. Note: If you are running Z39.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-612.html>PAGE 612</a></h6><p>Utilities 04/04 If Backup Prep is located in BKUPPREP, from a DOS prompt, go to BKUPPREP. The command you enter to run Backup Prep depends on the protocol your database server is running: TCP/IP: If your FairCom database server runs TCP/IP, type BKUPPREP –s[FairCom server name]@[IP address] –pTCPIP (e.g., BKUPPREP –sFSCSERVER@127.0.0.1 –pTCPIP). IPX/SPX: If your FairCom database server runs IPX/SPX, type BKUPPREP –s[FairCom server name]@[NetWare server name] –pSPX (e.g.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-613.html>PAGE 613</a></h6><p>Appendices Appendix A Glossary Accelerated Reader access A search that looks for materials belonging to the Accelerated Reader program. You can search for items with a particular reading level, point value, subject, and/or au thor. A method of obtaining electronic resources and programs. active status A status assigned to patrons who are currently enrolled at a school or to patrons at a public library who have checked out materials in the last two (or whatever designation assigned) years.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-614.html>PAGE 614</a></h6><p>Appendices autorecon available Bar Tender barcode barcode number barcode symbology barcode scanner baud 04/04 The automated process used to enhance the bibliographic records in the library database with information from an Alliance Plus CD ROM or Alliance Plus Online database. Autorecon is an abbreviated term for Automated Retrospective Conversion. A copy status that indicates a copy is on the shelf and available for checkout. See Also copy status.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-615.html>PAGE 615</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix A Glossary Circulation Desk The Circulation Desk module automates all tasks that would normally occur at the library's circulation desk, such as checkins, checkouts, creating fines, and placing copies on hold or reserve. circulation limits A general term referring to both the loan periods for the various circulation types and the patron limits for the various patron types. Circulation limits are usually based on existing library circulation policies.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-616.html>PAGE 616</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 copy status The copy status indicates the assigned designation of a copy. The possible copy statuses are: Available Lost Checked out At the bindery Missing Loaned out On hold The copy status can be changed from the Edit Copy dialog in Cataloging. counters daily startup data data extraction An internal log in the application used to determine a physical count, such as monthly and yearly circulation counters.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-617.html>PAGE 617</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix A Glossary duplicate copy DX See Replicate copy. See Union Data Exchange. dynamic IP address An IP address that changes each time the computer connects to the Internet. Dynamic IP addresses are useful if your library uses dial up networking to access the Internet. See Also IP address. Easy Editor One of the two data entry windows in Cataloging, used to add, edit, or delete MARC records. See also MARC Editor. eBook ejournal An electronic version of a printed book.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-618.html>PAGE 618</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 fine fine increment fine limit fine threshold Fines are generated by Circulation Plus when a patron does not return a copy on time (overdue fine), when a patron reports a lost copy (lost fine), or when a returned copy shows signs of damage (damaged fine). A fine type of refund allows librarians to track money owed back to a patron for payments made on lost items that have been re turned.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-619.html>PAGE 619</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix A Glossary HTTP HyperText Transport Protocol. The Internet protocol that allows Web browsers to retrieve information from servers. hyperlink An image or highlighted text (reference) in a document used to jump to another place (target) in a document. ID number A unique user defined number that identifies a patron, such as a student identification number, social security number, locker number, etc. IIS illegal holds import Internet Information Server.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-620.html>PAGE 620</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 IP address Internet Protocol address. An IP address is analogous to a postal address. It identifies the location of a computer or device on a network running TCP/IP. An IP address consists of twelve numbers divided into four sets of three. Example: 192.168.213.120 IPX/SPX Internetwork Packet Exchange/Sequence Packet Exchange. A protocol used for com munication and file transfer between workstations. SPX is a transport layer protocol.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-621.html>PAGE 621</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix A Glossary MARC Editor MARC Magician material material type menu menu bar MOC One of the two data entry windows in Cataloging, used to add, edit, or delete MARC records. See also Easy Editor. A separately-purchased application that corrects control field errors, punctuation, and indicators, and allows you to perform global editing. Physical entities that carry intellectual property (for example, books, graphics, audio recordings, machine readable data files). 1.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-622.html>PAGE 622</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 nonholdable copies See illegal holds. Novell A registered trademark of Novell, Inc., a manufacturer of networking software. ODBC Abbreviation of Open DataBase Connectivity, a standard database access method developed by Microsoft Corporation. The goal of ODBC is to make it possible to access any data from any application, regardless of the database management system (DBMS) handling the data.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-623.html>PAGE 623</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix A Glossary primary address The address that appears on bills and notices which are to be mailed home. This address appears on the Addresses dialog box in Patron Maintenance. printer port The connection port, typically located on the back of a computer, indicated usually by a small printer icon and used for connecting a printer or other devices. The printer port is sometimes referred to as the parallel port.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-624.html>PAGE 624</a></h6><p>Appendices scanner search types 04/04 See barcode scanner.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-625.html>PAGE 625</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix A Glossary special due date SQL stop words subfield tag tag number TCP/IP protocol template temporary record text file An option in the Circulation Desk module that allows the librarian to assign a non standard due date to copies on checkout to a patron. Abbreviation of Structured Query Language, and pronounced either see-kwell or as separate letters. SQL is a standardized query language for requesting information from a database. Words that are ignored during a keyword search.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-626.html>PAGE 626</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 USB user defined fine types USMARC Universal Serial Bus. Besides the default fine types that come with Circulation Desk Setup, a user can add fine types as needed; for example, band uniform rental for which a fine could be as sessed if the band uniform was damaged. These fines are not associated with copies. As of 1999, an obsolete term for the format of machine readable bibliographic and authority records. Replaced by MARC 21. USMOC An acronym for US MARC Organization Code.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-627.html>PAGE 627</a></h6><p>Appendix B Bibliographic and authority tags This appendix contains information about the following cataloging information: Bibliographic tags: MARC tags used in bibliographic records; reading and interest levels and the 521 tag; reading programs and the 526 tag; searchable tags; MARC tags used in Cataloging and OPAC searches; Authority tags: MARC tags used in Authority records.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-628.html>PAGE 628</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Bibliographic tags Tag Indicators No.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-629.html>PAGE 629</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix B Bibliographic and authority tags Bibliographic tags (Cont.) Tag No.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-630.html>PAGE 630</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Bibliographic tags (Cont.) Tag Indicators No. Description Rep Pos1 510 Citation/References Note Y 511 Participant or Performer Note Y 515 Numbering Peculiarities Note Y 520 Summary, etc. Note Y Target Audience Note 521 Pos2 Subfields Valid Nonrep 0 abcx36 abcx36 0 a6 a6 a6 a6 ∅ ab36 ab36 Y ∅ ab36 b36 Y 0 abcdixz568 abcdi56 Indexed See also: For additional information about the 521 tag, see page 634.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-631.html>PAGE 631</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix B Bibliographic and authority tags Bibliographic tags (Cont.) Tag No.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-632.html>PAGE 632</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Bibliographic tags (Cont.) Tag Indicators No. Description Rep 900 Local Call Number 901 Copy Information Pos1 Pos2 Subfields Valid Nonrep N a a Y abcdef abcdef Indexed Tags in the Easy Editor The following table shows the tags and subfields in the MARC record that are used when cataloging in the Easy Editor. For further information on the tags, their indicators, and subfields, see the previous Bibliographic tags table.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-633.html>PAGE 633</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix B Bibliographic and authority tags Tags in the Added Description tab Field name Tag/subfield Series 440a Volume 440v General Note 500a Summary Note 520a Interest Level 521a Study Program 526a Web URL 856u Description 856z Tags in the Subjects tab Field name Tag/subfield Topical 650a Personal 600a Geographic 651a Local 690a General 6XXx Geographic 6XXz Chronological 600d, 65Xy, or 690y Form 6XXv Tags in the Added Entries tab Field name Tag/subfield Ot</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-634.html>PAGE 634</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Reading and interest levels and the 521 tag The Target Audience Note (521 tag) in the MARC 21 bibliographic record contains information about reading and interest levels. The 521 tag is a repeatable tag. Decide what type of reading or interest level that you will be putting in the tag, and set the first indicator accordingly. Then enter the value in subfield a. The following table outlines some of the possible indicator and value combinations.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-635.html>PAGE 635</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix B Bibliographic and authority tags There are two ways you and your patrons can search for items in your collection that belong to a reading or study program: A keyword search examines the 521 tag. You can retrieve titles belonging to any reading program. A Lexile search examines the 521 tag specifically for Lexile information. FSC's Find a Book service can add the 521 tag information to the applicable records in your MARC database if you participate in these programs.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-636.html>PAGE 636</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 526 tag Example: Study Program Information Note (R) Guidelines _z Public note (R) Enter a note that will display in the OPAC. Use this subfield for quiz numbers related to this item in the reading program. _5 Institution to which field applies (NR) Enter your MARC Organization Code. Tag 526 0ø Subfield _a _c _d _z Entry Accelerated Reader 2.7 0.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-637.html>PAGE 637</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix B Bibliographic and authority tags Searchable tags This section describes the MARC bibliographic and authority tags used to conduct searches in Cataloging and the OPAC. The following table contains a list of the corresponding tags that Cataloging checks when searching. For more detail on these tags, see the table of bibliographic tags starting on page 627.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-638.html>PAGE 638</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Tags displayed in online public access catalogs The online public access catalogs allow your patrons to switch between full and brief record formats. The following table lists the bibliographic tags displayed in each format: Tags used in brief and full record display OPAC heading Tags used Title 245 Uniform Title 210, 240 Key Title 222 Added Title 246, 247 Author 1XX Series 4XX, 800, 810, 811, 830 Published 260 Phys. Desc.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-639.html>PAGE 639</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix B Bibliographic and authority tags Authority tags All authority records saved in the MARC Editor must have data entered in one 100 series tag (100, 110, 111, 130, 150, 151, or 155). The authority tags used by Cataloging to index authority records for searching and cataloging are identified starting on page 639. Use the following key to interpret the Authority tags table column headings. Key for the authority tag description table Column Description No.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-640.html>PAGE 640</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Authority tags (Cont.) Tag Indicators No.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-641.html>PAGE 641</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix B Bibliographic and authority tags Authority tags (Cont.) Tag Indicators No.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-642.html>PAGE 642</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-643.html>PAGE 643</a></h6><p>Appendix C Bibliographic and authority templates The MARC bibliographic and authority templates determine which tags and corresponding values appear automatically when you create a new record. If you only do occasional cataloging, we recommend that you use the input templates as they are. But if you are a professional cataloger and find yourself making the same changes every time you create a new MARC bibliographic or authority record, you may want to edit the template.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-644.html>PAGE 644</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 2. From the template editor, you can edit the Default leader, 007 (bibliographic templates only), or 008 fixed length tags, or edit, insert, or delete the variable length tags, as discussed on the following pages. Modifying bibliographic and authority templates works the same way. First, highlight the template and click edit to bring up the template editor.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-645.html>PAGE 645</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix C Bibliographic and authority templates Editing the leader, 007, and 008 tags To edit the leader, click Edit for the Default leader. The dialog appears, where you can click on the down arrows and select the appropriate content for the various fields. Click Help for additional information. When you're done, click Ok. To edit the 007 (bibliographic templates only) or 008 tags, follow the same procedure, except click Edit for the Default 007 or 008 tags.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-646.html>PAGE 646</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 you can make the necessary changes, as described in the following illustration: Check here to make this tag required for the template. Type the default indicators here. If you want the first in dicator to be blank, be sure to type a blank space be fore the second indicator. Type the default subfields here. Type the underscore, then the subfield letter, then any information you want to be automatically included. There is a limit of 28 characters total.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-647.html>PAGE 647</a></h6><p>Appendix D Barcode symbologies If your site uses any barcode symbology other than Follett Classic, you must define the barcode symbology. This appendix contains the following information: an overview of barcode composition; basic barcode terminology; a listing of your barcode symbology options; instructions for defining your barcode symbologies; and a description of how to assign barcodes to items and patrons. What does a barcode contain? A barcode contains two primary parts: bars and spaces.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-648.html>PAGE 648</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Barcode terminology For explanations of the terminology used in barcode names and some criteria for selecting Follett Classic or one of the other symbologies, see the following table: Barcode terminology Barcode term Description Check digit The check digit is always the last character and ensures accurate read ings when barcodes are scanned. Follett Classic A family of barcode symbologies consisting of barcodes that contain seven visible positions or fewer.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-649.html>PAGE 649</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix D Barcode symbologies What are your barcode options? The Follett applications recognize many industry standard barcode symbologies. The following table lists and describes your barcode options: Symbology Description Follett Classic symbologies A family of symbologies consisting of barcodes that contain seven visible positions or fewer. The Follett Classic family of symbologies includes: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, Codabar, LabelCode IV, and LabelCode V.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-650.html>PAGE 650</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Defining the barcode symbology When you define a barcode symbology, you tell Circulation Desk, Cataloging, and Patron Maintenance: If a component, such as the location code, exists in the symbology your site uses. The position of the component in the barcode symbology. The length of the component.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-651.html>PAGE 651</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix D Barcode symbologies The following table lists and describes the information you need to know about your barcodes to set up your barcode symbologies for Circulation Plus/Catalog Plus: Barcode Setup dialog options Field Description Symbology Name of the barcode symbology that the system uses to check barcodes when searching for a patron or library item.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-652.html>PAGE 652</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Barcode Setup dialog options (Cont.) Field Description Check Digit: Length The number of digits in the check digit. This field is initially 0. It changes to 1 if the selected symbology is neither Generic nor Fol lett Classic. Total length The total number of characters and digits in the barcode, including the check digit. If you are editing this field, you can only enter the numbers 4 through 14.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-653.html>PAGE 653</a></h6><p>Appendix E Using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+ A PHD (Portable Handheld Device) is a barcode scanner that collects, stores, and transmits data. You can use a PHD to simplify certain circulation, cataloging, inventory, and reporting activities. Follett Software currently supports four PHD models. This appendix provides a comparison of the three Telxon models and instructions for their use and maintenance.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-654.html>PAGE 654</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Supported barcodes The Telxon PHDs support most of the barcodes supported by Circulation Plus and Catalog Plus with the exceptions noted below: Barcode Symbology PHD+ PHD+ II PHD Laser+ Follett Classic X* X* X* Generic Codabar X X X Codabar Mod 10 X X X Generic Code 39 X X X Code 39 Mod 10 Code 39 Mod 11 Code 39 Mod 43 X X X X** X** X** Interleaved 2 of 5 A X X X Generic LabelCode 5 X X Generic Interleaved 2 of 5 * The Telxon PHDs do not support Lab</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-655.html>PAGE 655</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix E Using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+ Connecting a PHD to your computer Warning: Only connect the PHD cable to the computer when the computer is turned off. This prevents a static charge or power surge from damaging or destroying your equipment or data. To connect a Telxon PHD to your computer, use the following instructions: 1. Turn off your computer and PHD. 2.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-656.html>PAGE 656</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 1. Make certain your PHD is connected to your computer. 2. From the Site tabs in System Setup, select the PHD tab: Select the PHD model you're using. If the default port and speed aren't correct, click Edit and make the desired changes. For instructions, see How to change the PHD settings" (page 43). These instructions change based on the PHD you choose. 3.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-657.html>PAGE 657</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix E Using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+ Telxon PHD to collect information for remote circulation, see page 661. To collect inventory, copy, or patron information, see page 663. The main menu, prompts, and messages appear in the display screen. The Normal mode functions are printed above the keys. The Telxon PHD main menu The PHD main menu is the starting place for all PHD operations. To access the PHD main menu, turn on the PHD by pressing the ON/OFF key.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-658.html>PAGE 658</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Keys used most often Of the 35 keys on the keyboard, you will typically use only 13 of them (see the following table): Frequently used keys Key Function ENTER Yes SP No or Space bar D Exit E To send scanned data to the computer, from the PHD main menu, press E. F To erase the scanned data in your PHD, from the PHD main menu, press F. O When your PHD is in the Circulation or Inventory mode, press O to check how many scans are stored in your PHD.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-659.html>PAGE 659</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix E Using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+ PHD features Feature How it works Additional data entry line at end of file When you are at the end of the file, the bottom of the screen displays an empty line for entering data. If you try to move forward past the last entry in the file, the END OF FILE message appears. If you try to move backward past the first entry in the file, the BEGINNING OF FILE message appears. Note: Press D for EXIT to return to the data entry screen.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-660.html>PAGE 660</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 PHD task commands for file maintenance (Cont.) Task How to do it Moving backwards in a data file Press (Backspace) to move back in the file. When you reach the beginning of the file, a message appears. Note: When you review stored barcode numbers, you cannot enter any new scans. To start scanning again, move to the end of the file or press D to exit. Moving forwards in a data file Press to move ahead or forward in the file.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-661.html>PAGE 661</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix E Using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+ PHD Laser+: To scan barcodes using a PHD Laser+ scanner: 1. Point the unit at the barcode label and press the SCAN button. A red light emits from the scanner's head. 2. The line of light must extend beyond both ends of the barcode for the barcode to be read. To determine the optimal distance from the barcode, position the scanner about 2" from the barcode, and then gradually pull it farther away until it beeps and the red light on top flashes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-662.html>PAGE 662</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Starting circulation mode and setting the date To collect remote circulation data with the PHD: 1. Turn on your PHD (see page 657). From the PHD main menu, press C (Circulation). A message appears asking if you want to change the date and time. If the date and time are correct, press SP (No) and skip to Checking out and renewing items" below or Checking in items" below. Important: Circulation Desk processes transactions based on the month and day you entered them into the PHD.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-663.html>PAGE 663</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix E Using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+ Checking in items 1. To check in items, once you've accepted or changed the date, press SP (No) at the CHECKOUT? prompt, and then press ENTER (Yes) at the CHECKIN? prompt. 2. The SCAN BARCODE prompt appears. To check in a copy, scan or type its barcode. (After typing a barcode, press ENTER to save it.) Repeat this step for each copy you want to check in. If you want to switch to checkout, press D (Exit) until you return to the PHD main menu.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-664.html>PAGE 664</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Important: If you're gathering scans for an inventory, process the scanned data as soon as possible. If you continue to circulate during an inventory, it's likely that an item you scanned may be checked out before you process the remote inventory data from the PHD. When you process the data, the exception report will notify you of any items that are checked out. Inventory does not check these items in.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-665.html>PAGE 665</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix E Using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+ Common usage problems with the Telxon PHD If you have this problem Try this Barcode won't scan. Use the keypad to type the number (you may have to use the SHIFT key if typing letters), and then press ENTER. Duplicate scans With the PHD+/PHD+ II scanner, if you do a back and forth scan motion and hear a beep twice or accidentally read the same material or same shelf twice don't worry about it.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-666.html>PAGE 666</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Common usage problems with the Telxon PHD (Cont.) If you have this problem Try this Scans are sluggish. There could be several causes for sluggish scans. Try the following: Clean the scanner tip on the PHD+ or PHD+ II. You can pry the tip off the unit with a dime or screwdriver and clean it on the inside with a lint free cloth and denatured alcohol. Be sure the tip is dry before replacing it on the unit. Make sure you are holding your PHD at the correct angle.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-667.html>PAGE 667</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix E Using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+ Telxon PHD error messages (Cont.) Message Cause & solution LOST DSR Your PHD is not connected to the computer or is connected to the wrong port. Check the cable connections, and then try changing the port. LOW BATTERY The NiCd batteries need to be charged. Do this immediately! If you are using a PHD Laser+, change the 9 volt alkaline.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-668.html>PAGE 668</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Important: Rebooting a Telxon PHD will erase all scans from its memory. Maintenance information The PHD is a precision electronic device and must be treated with care. To ensure the longevity of your PHD, make sure you follow these guidelines. Important: Make sure your PHD is turned off before connecting or removing any accessories, replacing the batteries, or replacing the memory chip.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-669.html>PAGE 669</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix E Using a PHD+, PHD+ II, or PHD Laser+ To charge the batteries for your PHD unit, make sure the device is turned off. Connect the battery charger to the port (location and type of end vary from unit to unit). Plug the battery charger into an electrical outlet. Charge all units for 16 hours initially. Thereafter charge them for a minimum of 8 hours only when the LOW BATTERY message appears. Remove the battery charger from the outlet, and then disconnect the charger from the PHD.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-670.html>PAGE 670</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Warning: If your Telxon PHD is left without batteries for more then 20 minutes, all scans stored in it will be lost. Disposing of old batteries Eventually, your batteries will no longer hold a charge. For environmental safety, we recommend that you do not throw your batteries in the trash. Many companies accept used batteries and recycle them or dispose of them properly. One such company is: Power Express Recycling Dept.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-671.html>PAGE 671</a></h6><p>Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ A PHD (Portable Handheld Device) is a barcode scanner that collects, stores, and transmits data. You can use a PHD to simplify certain circulation, cataloging, inventory, and reporting activities. Follett Software currently supports four PHD models. This appendix provides instructions for using the PHD Dolphin+ from Hand Held® Products. It also includes a troubleshooting table and a Quick Reference Guide.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-672.html>PAGE 672</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 PHD Dolphin+ basics With the PHD application installed, your PHD Dolphin+ should appear identical to the one pictured below. Take a moment to become familiar with the layout of the keypad and the functions of the various keys. When you're ready, see the following sections for more information about your PHD. This symbol ( ) shows the charge in the main battery. When the battery is low, it starts blinking.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-673.html>PAGE 673</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ You'll notice that there are three letters or symbols to the left of each numeric key and the ." key: To enter the first letter or symbol next to a key, press the key once. To enter the second letter/symbol, press the key twice within one second. To enter the third letter/symbol, press the key three times within one second. To switch back from alpha to numeric mode, press the SHIFT key again.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-674.html>PAGE 674</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Collecting circulation information Circulation mode lets you check out, renew, and check in copies outside your library or resource center. Before you start, make certain to complete the steps outlined in Before recording transactions with a PHD" on page 176. Important: Circulation Desk processes transactions using the month and day you entered them into the PHD. The year is based on the workstation's system date.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-675.html>PAGE 675</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ Checking out and renewing items 1. To check out or renew items using your PHD, select the F2 option (Check Out) from the Library Circulation menu. A message appears asking you to confirm the system date and time. If the date and time are correct, press BKSP (No) and skip to step 3. 2. If you need to change either the date or time, press ENTER (Yes). The Date Entry screen appears, with the current system month. If it's correct, press ENTER.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-676.html>PAGE 676</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Collecting inventory scans You can use your PHD's inventory mode to gather copy barcode scans for Inventory. Using a PHD eliminates the extra work of bringing the books to a workstation, thereby decreasing your overall inventory time. To enter inventory mode, from the main menu press F1. The Circulation Plus menu appears. Press F2 to open the Library Inventory menu. From the Library Inventory menu you can: Scan items for Inventory. See the following steps.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-677.html>PAGE 677</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ 1. To collect patron scans with your PHD, select the F1 option (Scan Patron) from the Patrons Menu. The Scan Library Patron screen appears. 2. Scan by pressing the ON/SCAN key, or type the barcode of each patron you want. (After typing a barcode, press ENTER to save it.) Note: The Scan Library Patron screen displays the last patron barcode you entered.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-678.html>PAGE 678</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 To leave the Scan Copies screen, press BKSP. When you are finished collecting scans, return the PHD Dolphin + to the HomeBase. See also: To transfer the scans in your PHD to a particular application, see the appropriate section: Exporting bibliographic records" (page 312), Update categories, circulation types, or copy status with a PHD" (page 338), Remove categories from copies with a PHD" (page 340), Delete copies with a PHD" (page 342), and Printing from a PHD" (page 496).</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-679.html>PAGE 679</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ product information for the PHD Dolphin+ application appears. Press F3 (Scan Counts) to see the number of scans in of each feature. Important: The PHD Dolphin+ can store up to 4,000 scans for each feature. However, we recommend that you upload the scans to a workstation after gathering 1,200 for a feature to minimize any possible loss due to mechanical or user error.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-680.html>PAGE 680</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Message Cause / Solution Could not open the PHD+ program file. The Follett application attempted to contact the Dolphin to load the application, but received no reply. (on the computer window) You may not have pressed the correct key on the Dolphin to load the PHD application. Press ENTER for a first-time application load, or F3-Update Software on the Setup menu on subsequent loads. In either case, also click Load on the PHD tab. DOS0011: Invalid Format The REMOTE.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-681.html>PAGE 681</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ Message Cause / Solution The end of file was reached. The Follett application contacted the Dolphin but no scans were transferred. File not transferred!" and/or Waiting for device" may have appeared on the Dolphin File Transfer dialog. There are several possible causes: (on an exception report or the computer window) A path statement in the server's Dcomm.ini file is wrong.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-682.html>PAGE 682</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 PHD Dolphin+ Quick Reference Guide Important Keys ON SCAN This key serves three purposes: Turns on the PHD Dolphin+ Triggers the laser when in scanning mode Returns you to the Main Menu when not in scanning mode BKSP This key serves three purposes: Backspaces when in scanning mode Acts as the NO key Acts as the ESC key to return you to the previous menu ENTER This key acts as the YES key.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-683.html>PAGE 683</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ PHD Dolphin+ Main Menu Battery Indicator. A solid battery, or one with a checkmark, indicates a full charge. Number-key mode Indicator. Shows the current mode numeric or alpha. There are two ways to return to the Main Menu: Press the ON SCAN key when not in scanning mode. Press the BKSP key repeatedly. Procedures In this section are the procedures, in abbreviated form, that you can perform using the PHD Dolphin+.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-684.html>PAGE 684</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Entering scans into Inventory with the PHD Dolphin+ On the computer: 1. Open Inventory. 2. Click the Remote button on the toolbar. 3. Select the PHD Dolphin+ radio button. 4. Make any other desired on-screen selections. On the PHD Dolphin+: 5. From the Main Menu, press F1-Circulation Plus. 6. Press F2-Inventory. 7. Press F1-Scan Items. 8. Scan the copy barcodes by pressing ON SCAN to trigger the laser. 9. Press BKSP to exit scanning mode. 10.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-685.html>PAGE 685</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ Creating reports using patron or copy barcodes You can generate the following reports using the PHD Dolphin+: Bibliography Report Title List Patron Barcode List Patron Cards Patron Name List On the computer: 1. Open Reports. 2. Select the desired report. 3. Select either Titles via PHD or Patrons via PHD in the Select by: list. 4. Click Print Preview, Print to File, or Print. 5. Select the PHD Dolphin+ radio button.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-686.html>PAGE 686</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Updating or deleting patron records via the PHD Dolphin+ You can edit the following six patron record fields using the PHD Dolphin+: Patron status Patron type Location 1 or 2 User Field 1 or 2 You can also delete patron records using the PHD Dolphin+. On the computer: 1. Open Patron Maintenance. 2. From the Edit menu, select one of the following: Update via PHD Delete Patrons via PHD 3. Select the PHD Dolphin+ radio button. 4.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-687.html>PAGE 687</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ Exporting MARC records via the PHD Dolphin+ On the computer: 1. Open Cataloging. 2. From the File menu, select Export MARC 21/852 Holdings Format | via PHD. 3. Select the PHD Dolphin+ radio button. 4. Select the desired check boxes. On the PHD Dolphin+: 5. From the Main Menu, press F1-Circulation Plus. 6. Press F4-Copies. 7. Press F1-Scan Copies. 8. Using the ON SCAN button, scan the barcodes of the copies to be exported. 9.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-688.html>PAGE 688</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Updating copy records via the PHD Dolphin+ The following copy record fields may be edited using the PHD Dolphin+: Circulation Type Category Copy Status On the computer: 1. Open Cataloging. 2. From the Edit menu, select Update Copies via PHD. 3. Select the PHD Dolphin+ radio button. 4. Select the desired update options. 5. Click Update. On the PHD Dolphin+: 6. From the Main Menu, press F1-Circulation Plus. 7. Press F4-Copies. 8. Press F1-Scan Copies. 9.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-689.html>PAGE 689</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ Removing categories from copy records via the PHD Dolphin+ On the computer: 1. Open Cataloging. 2. From the Edit menu, select Remove Category via PHD. 3. Select the PHD Dolphin+ radio button. 4. Select the category to be removed. 5. Click Remove. On the PHD Dolphin+: 6. From the Main Menu, press F1-Circulation Plus. 7. Press F4-Copies. 8. Press F1-Scan Copies. 9.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-690.html>PAGE 690</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Deleting copy records via the PHD Dolphin+ 1. Open Cataloging. 2. From the Edit menu, select Delete Copies via PHD. 3. Select the PHD Dolphin+ radio button. 4. Select the check box, if desired. 5. Click Delete. On the PHD Dolphin+: 6. From the Main Menu, press F1-Circulation Plus. 7. Press F4-Copies. 8. Press F1-Scan Copies. 9. Using the ON SCAN button, scan the barcodes of the copies to be deleted. 10. Press BKSP to exit scanning mode. 11.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-691.html>PAGE 691</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix F Using a PHD Dolphin+ Circulating with the PHD Dolphin+ 1. Open Circulation Desk. 2. Click the Remote Circ button on the toolbar. 3. Select the PHD Dolphin+ radio button. 4. Make all other desired on-screen selections. On the PHD Dolphin+: 5. From the Main Menu, press F1-Circulation Plus. 6. Press F1-Circulation. 7. Press F1-Check In or F2-Check Out. 8. Press ENTER if you need to change the date, or BKSP if you do not. 9.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-692.html>PAGE 692</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Erasing scans in the PHD Dolphin+ You can erase scans from just one feature (Circulation, Inventory, Patron, or Copies) at a time, or erase all the scans at the same time. To erase scans from one feature only: 1. From the Main Menu, press F1-Circulation Plus. 2. Select the feature whose scans you want to delete: F1, F2, F3, or F4. 3. Press F4-Erase (CIRC, INV, PAT, or COPY) scans. 4. Press ENTER to confirm that you wish to delete them.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-693.html>PAGE 693</a></h6><p>Appendix G The Bar Tender The Bar Tender for Windows can be used to replace missing or damaged barcode labels and to print patron barcode labels. After installing The Bar Tender with the instructions in The Bar Tender for Windows reference manual, the following information will help you define the page layout and barcode information, print sequential barcodes, and print patron barcode labels.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-694.html>PAGE 694</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Defining the barcode 1. To define the barcode specifications, double-click on the barcode or choose Modify | Selected Object. From the Modify Selected Bar Code Object dialog, select the Bar Code tab, and then choose a symbology from the Symbology drop down list. Note: If you're using labels from Follett Software Company, under Dimensions, change the X dimension to 9.2 mils and set the Ratio to Auto.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-695.html>PAGE 695</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix G The Bar Tender 2. To modify the text field's size and contents, double-click on Text Data or choose Modify | Selected Object. From the Modify Selected Text Object dialog, select the Font tab. If the text field is too large to fit on the label, reduce the font size point size 9 will probably work best, but you can experiment with different font sizes and typefaces. 3. Select the Data Source tab.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-696.html>PAGE 696</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 3. To select and setup the patron file you want to use, from The Bar Tender main menu, select File | Input Data File Setup. From the Input Data File Setup dialog, set the Type option to Text File. In the Data Selection group box, click Select. The Specify Data File dialog appears. 4. Set the List Files of Type to All [*.*], and then change the Drives option to the location of the patron export file you wish to input.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-697.html>PAGE 697</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix G The Bar Tender Entering a check digit character in The Bar Tender will result in invalid barcodes. Example: To define the barcode specifications for a Code 39 Mod 10 barcode with a check digit, after selecting the symbology and check digit type, select the Data Source tab: Enter the beginning barcode number in the Screen Data text field without the check digit (e.g., 318IU00000806), and then set the Data Source.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-698.html>PAGE 698</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 Notes</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-699.html>PAGE 699</a></h6><p>Appendix H Configuring scanners This appendix contains the following: information on using the ISBN barcode scanning feature; information on determining which scanners can be used to scan the ISBN barcodes; and the programming barcodes you'll need to configure these scanners. Uses Most items in your collection have ISBN barcodes imprinted on them by their publisher or producer. To make use of these barcodes in the library, you can configure your scanner to read them.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-700.html>PAGE 700</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 The following scanners will not support the scanning of ISBNs in Circulation Plus or Catalog Plus, version 4.x or higher: The ScanTeam 3210 CCD scanner and the PSC Quick Laser+ scanner. If you want to utilize the scanning feature, you will need to upgrade to a different scanner. PSC Quick Scan Laser+ scanner. If you want to utilize the scanning feature, you will need to upgrade to a different scanner.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-701.html>PAGE 701</a></h6><p>04/04 Appendix H Configuring scanners Programming codes for ScanTeam 3400 CCD scanner To program the ScanTeam 3400 CCD for ISBN scanning, scan the following seven programming codes. Scan the barcodes in order from 1) through 7). Scan each barcode only once. After scanning each barcode, you will hear 1 or 2 beeps, indicating that the scan was successful.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-702.html>PAGE 702</a></h6><p>Appendices 04/04 then you may proceed with the programming of the Scan Team 5400 Laser scanner. Version: 2.0.4 or 2.0.5. Note: If you have software revision 2.0.5.2 (DOS/WIN) or 2.0.4.2 (MAC) or greater, then you will not need to perform this programming. ISBN scanning is already enabled in scanner(s) with this software revision. Programming codes for ScanTeam 5400 Laser scanner To program the ScanTeam 5400 Laser for ISBN scanning, scan the following two programming codes.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-703.html>PAGE 703</a></h6><p>Index Symbols ?. See wildcards *.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-704.html>PAGE 704</a></h6><p>Index 04/04 description of, 385, 386, 390 interrupting, 390 keyword replacement, 389 preparing for, 387, 391 restarting, 388 running, 387 390, 391 394 standard numbers and, 387 updating bibliographic records, 386 387 password, 41 selecting a data source, 382 starting, 381 382 Alliance Plus CDs for autorecons, 382 changing in Cataloging, 245 247 copying records from, 251 searching in Cataloging, 245 247 Alliance Plus Online for autorecons, 382 copying records from, 251 proxy configuration, 58 searchi</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-705.html>PAGE 705</a></h6><p>04/04 Index printing on patron cards, 572 printing on patron lists, 570 printing patron labels, 567 recognized by Follett applications, 649 scanning in Circulation Desk, 123 scanning with a PHD Dolphin+, 676 677 sounds while scanning, 127 supported by the PHD Dolphin+, 673 supported by the Telxon PHDs, 654 symbologies, 647 652 defining symbologies, 39 40 mixing symbologies, 38 selecting symbologies, 38, 649 setting up symbologies, 37 40 testing symbologies, 40, 650 652 terminology, 648 test print for patr</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-706.html>PAGE 706</a></h6><p>Index adding records to, 346 347 autorecon in, 347 348 enhancing records in, 346 using MARC Magician with, 348 349 merging copies in, 351 printing the contents, 349 350 viewing records in, 351 Bookbag setting up for Visual OPAC, 416 setting up in OPAC, 406 408 using in text OPAC, 475 using in Visual OPAC, 484 WebCollection Plus, 439 books. See copies BookWhere. See Z39.50 Server Guide Boolean operators, 460 463 borrowing. See circulation borrowing limits.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-707.html>PAGE 707</a></h6><p>04/04 Index removing from copies with a PHD Dolphin+, 689 removing globally, 54 renaming, 53 setting up, 52 54 sorting order, 57 splitting a collection using, 318 updating copies individually, 330 Category Statistics Report, 539 540 ceiling dates checking out and, 138 setting up, 77 CEMARC records, fields in, 266 Check Database Integrity utility, 594 checking in See also circulation; fines; holds; remote circulation; reserves alert sounds, 152 assessing fines when, 158 159 barcode labels damaged or missin</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-708.html>PAGE 708</a></h6><p>Index printing a list of copies with certain, 516 setting maximum checkouts for, 78 standard, 88 updating copies globally, 326 updating copies individually, 330 classroom transactions.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-709.html>PAGE 709</a></h6><p>04/04 Index updating copies individually, 330 viewing during circulation, 134 135 counters, about resetting, 37 cross-references See also authority records creating as authority records saved, 56 rebuilding in Cataloging, 346 directory rights. See Installation Guide due dates non-circulating, 141 142 setting up, 76 78 special, 143 144 viewing in Circulation Desk, 142 143 DX. See Follett Data Exchange Guide customer number, setting up, 35 customizing.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-710.html>PAGE 710</a></h6><p>Index Empty Database utility, 602 enhancement request form, 727 ephemeral materials. See temporary records 04/04 F FairCom Server. See database servers; Installation Guide file formats. See import file formats error messages. See troubleshooting File Reload utility.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-711.html>PAGE 711</a></h6><p>04/04 Index deleting subject headings, 332 deleting tags, 334 335 deleting titles without copies, 335 linking copies to funding sources, 327 329 linking copies to vendors, 327 329 updating bibliographic headings, 324 326 updating bibliographic records, 324 326 updating call number prefixes, 326 updating circulation types, 326 updating enumeration descriptions, 326 updating funding sources on copies, 326 329 updating patron records, 191 192 updating sub locations, 326 updating vendors on copies, 326 329 us</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-712.html>PAGE 712</a></h6><p>Index managing, 169 placing in Circulation Desk, 168 169 placing in OPAC, 473 474 placing in WebCollection Plus, 445 printing notices, 553 555 queue, 170 174 reviving, 169 170 setting up patron limits, 76 78 setting up requests in WebCollection Plus, 440 442 setting up time limits, 78 80 statistics report, 556 system statistics reports, 582 transactions report, 557 558 troubleshooting, 174 viewing patron information, 130 133 hours setup, 85 hyperlinks See also electronic resources in OPAC display, 250</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-713.html>PAGE 713</a></h6><p>04/04 Index creating remote batch files for DOS, 226 reopening last inventory, 231 resetting missing copies, 231 saving remote inventory data, 223 shelf-checking option, 222 starting an, 217 statistics in main window, 230 using a Telxon PHD, 663 Inventory (module) Begin Inventory process, 217 218 password, 41 statistics in main window, 218 Inventory List by Call Number, 558 559 Inventory List by Title, 559 560 ISBNs See also MARC Editor Help configuring scanners for, 699 702 scanning in Cataloging, 247 l</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-714.html>PAGE 714</a></h6><p>Index M main entries. See bibliographic records maintenance See also utilities backing up your database, 605 612 Telxon PHDs, 668 670 maintenance utilities. See utilities MARC 21 records. See authority records; bibliographic records MARC databases.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-715.html>PAGE 715</a></h6><p>04/04 Index in WebCollection Plus, 445 setting up, 74 N name lists, patron, 575 577 navigation, in Visual OPAC, 479 netLibrary accessing the website, 237 eBooks in Cataloging, 250 eBooks in OPAC, 467 setting up ID number, 35 toolbar button, 237 network rights. See Installation Guide networks. See Installation Guide NiCd rechargeable batteries, 668 670 non-circulating copies, 141 142 non-circulating eBook circulation type, 46 nonfiling characters editing indicators for, 274 setup options, 58 not.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-716.html>PAGE 716</a></h6><p>Index OPAC display mode in Cataloging, 249 or.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-717.html>PAGE 717</a></h6><p>04/04 Index user fields, 72 viewing patron info in Circulation Desk, 130 133 viewing statistics in Circulation Desk, 133 patron searches in Circulation Desk, 123 125 in Patron Maintenance, 184 186 patron statistics, removing, 601 Patron Statistics Report, 577 578 patron types defined, 69 71 setting up circulation policies, 76 78 setting up default, 72 74 statistics report, 577 patrons. See patron records paying fines See also fines fine balance, 157 individual fines, 158 printing receipts, 156 penalties.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-718.html>PAGE 718</a></h6><p>Index printing barcode labels with The Bar Tender, 695 copy barcodes, 514 date slips, 552 hold notices, 553 555 overdue notices, 561 565 patron barcodes, 567 patron information in Circulation Desk, 132 patron library cards, 572 575 proof sheets, 277, 284 with Receipt Printer in Circulation Desk, 120 121 reports, 495 498 setting up in OPAC, 406 spine/pocket labels, 522 525 system information, 582 584 text OPAC options, 470 with Transaction Tracker in Circulation Desk, 120 121 Visual OPAC options, 481,</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-719.html>PAGE 719</a></h6><p>04/04 Index before recording transactions, 176 checking in copies with holds, 179 182 exception report, 179 182 gathering data with a PHD Dolphin+, 674 675 gathering data with a Telxon PHD, 661 663 processing collected transactions, 176 182 reshelving non-checked out items, 177 troubleshooting, 182 using a PHD Dolphin+, 691 remote inventory See also inventory; PHD; PHD Dolphin+; Telxon PHDs data files for Mac OS, 225 exception reports for remote, 228 using a portable computer, 223 227 processing a data fi</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-720.html>PAGE 720</a></h6><p>Index resetting, search stations. See inactivity timeouts reshelving items, 152 alert sounds, 152 in remote circulation, 177 resource sharing. See exporting; importing restarting autorecon, 388 Process Misses, 397 restoring access to Cataloging, 238 to Circulation Desk, 118 120 restoring from backup See also backup requirements for third-party software, 612 using Backup and Restore, 609 610 restrictions.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-721.html>PAGE 721</a></h6><p>04/04 Index default Cataloging editor, 57 default patron type, 72 74 due dates, 76 events, 43 44 Find Headings default list, 57 fine limits for patron types, 77 fines calculation option, 81 82 fixed due dates, 77 Follett customer number, 35 36 General OPAC tab, 404 groups, 101 holds limits for patron types, 77 holds time limits, 78 80 inactivity timeouts for Circulation Desk, 88 keyword generation, automatic, 56 leading articles in search terms, 58 library hours, 85 library identification, 35 36 library s</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-722.html>PAGE 722</a></h6><p>Index symbols. See diacritics System Circulation Statistics Report, 582 System Information Report, 582 584 System Setup.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-723.html>PAGE 723</a></h6><p>04/04 TitlePeek in Cataloging, 250 disabling in OPAC, 406 in OPAC, 469 proxy configuration, 405 proxy configuration for Cataloging, 58 setting up, 57 in WebCollection Plus, 448 titles.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-724.html>PAGE 724</a></h6><p>Index reloading DX members, 112 searching, 247 and Selected database sources, 247 setting up groups, 101 setting up members, 101 112 tags not exchanged, 92 union information setup, 95 101 updating DX members, 112 Union Data Exchange Server creating better bibliographic records, 95 error logging, 110 filtering rules, 94 matching rules, 95 participation levels, 93 tags not exchanged, 92 04/04 when to run, 591 Utilities (module) accessing, 592 593 description of, 591 592 password, 41 starting, 592 593</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-725.html>PAGE 725</a></h6><p>04/04 Index password for Setup Information page, 432 Patron Empowerment in, 445 Patron Empowerment setup, 74 Patron Empowerment toolbar buttons, 439 QuickLinks, 448 reading level, displaying, 449 review sources, displaying, 449 rights, 431 setting up, 434 456 Spanish, 454 starting the service, 431 State Standards setup, 443 stopping the service, 431 testing your setup, 452 453 TitlePeek in, 448 toolbar options, 438 troubleshooting, 456 URL for search page, 432 433 URL for Setup Information page, 432 Visua</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-726.html>PAGE 726</a></h6><p>Index 04/04</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-727.html>PAGE 727</a></h6><p>Enhancement request form Please complete and send to: Follett Software Company 1391 Corporate Drive McHenry, IL 60050-7041 Attn: Marketing Department Phone: (800) 323-3397 FAX: (815) 344-8774 Email address: marketing@fsc.follett.com An enhancement may be related to product functionality, a manual, or FSC service. Please request only one enhancement per form. Name: Title: Institution (full name): Library Type: Phone #: District: Elementary Jr.</p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-728.html>PAGE 728</a></h6><p></p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-729.html>PAGE 729</a></h6><p></p></li><li><h6><a class="text-decoration-none text-link fw-bold" href=/manual/follett/version-6-00/corp-computer-accessories-user-manual/page-730.html>PAGE 730</a></h6><p>The User's Guide v6.</p></li></ul></nav></div></section></section></main><footer class=page-footer><div class="container flex-column py-3 py-sm-4"><div class="row mb-1 mb-sm-2 mb-md-5"><a href=/ class="brand offset-sm-0 col-sm-4 col-md-3 col-lg-2 offset-2 col-8 text-center text-md-start"><img class=logo-small src=/assets/img/brand-large.png alt=Manualshelf></a></div><div class=row><dl class="text-center text-sm-start col-sm-3"><dt class=fw-bold>Who We Are</dt><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=/about>About Us</a></dd><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=/company>Company</a></dd><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=/careers>Careers</a></dd><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=/terms>Terms & Privacy</a></dd></dl><dl class="text-center text-sm-start col-sm-3"><dt class=fw-bold>Resources</dt><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=/brands>List of Manufacturers</a></dd><dd><a href=/ class=text-decoration-none>Support</a></dd><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=/press>For the Press</a></dd><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=/press#assets>Media assets</a></dd><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=/faq>FAQ</a></dd></dl><dl class="text-center text-sm-start col-sm-3"><dt class=fw-bold>Get in touch</dt><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=#>Blog</a></dd><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=#>Email</a></dd><dd><a class=text-decoration-none href=/dmca>DMCA</a></dd></dl></div><div class=row><div class="text-center text-sm-start col-sm-4 pe-sm-0"><a href=https://www.facebook.com/pages/ManualShelf/1488826334681423 class="fs-5 text-center d-inline-block social rounded-2 align-middle text-decoration-none me-2"><i class="fab fa-facebook-f"></i></a><a href=https://www.twitter.com/ManualShelf class="fs-5 text-center d-inline-block social rounded-2 align-middle text-decoration-none me-2"><i class="fab fa-twitter"></i></a><a href=https://plus.google.com/+ManualShelf class="fs-5 text-center d-inline-block social rounded-2 align-middle text-decoration-none me-2"><i class="fab fa-google-plus-g"></i></a><a href=http://www.pinterest.com/ManualShelf class="fs-5 text-center d-inline-block social rounded-2 align-middle text-decoration-none"><i class="fab fa-pinterest-p"></i></a></div><div class="col col-sm-8 d-flex flex-column align-items-center flex-sm-row flex-wrap flex-sm-nowrap justify-content-center justify-content-sm-end"><div class="copy w-auto d-flex align-items-center justify-content-center justify-content-sm-end mt-2 mt-sm-0 me-2">ManualShelf © 2013-2025</div><select class="form-select form-select-sm w-auto mt-2 mt-sm-0"><option value=usa>USA</option></select><div></div></div><div id=pixel><script>
googletag.cmd.push(function() { googletag.display('pixel'); });
</script></div></footer><script src=/assets/js/jquery-3.3.1.min.js></script><script src=/assets/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js></script><script src=/assets/js/jquery.autocomplete.min.js></script><script type=text/javascript>
$.extend({
redirectPost: function(location, args) {
var form = '';
$.each(args, function(key, value) {
form += '<input type="hidden" name="' + key + '" value="' + value + '">';
});
form = '<form id="s1" action="' + location + '" method="POST">' + form + '</form>';
$(document.body).append(form);
$("#s1").submit();
}
});
$(document).ready(function(){
$("#query").autocomplete({
minChars: 3,
groupBy: 'type',
paramName: 'q',
dataType: 'json',
serviceUrl: '/autocomplete',
noCache: true,
showNoSuggestionNotice: true,
noSuggestionNotice: 'Zarro results found',
onSelect: function (suggestion) {
$.redirectPost(suggestion.data.url, {highlight: encodeURIComponent(JSON.stringify(suggestion.data.hls))});
}
});
var toc = $('.toc-selector');
if (toc.length) {
var slideParams = { duration: 800, easing: 'linear' };
toc.click(function() {
$(this).toggleClass('open');
var section = $('.toc-content');
var isCollapsed = section.attr('data-collapsed') === 'true';
if (isCollapsed) {
section.slideDown(slideParams)
section.attr('data-collapsed', 'false')
} else {
section.slideUp(slideParams);
section.attr('data-collapsed', 'true')
}
});
}
});
var lastSmall = $(window).width() < 576;
$(window).resize(function() {
var newSmall = $(window).width() < 576;
if (lastSmall != newSmall) {
lastSmall = newSmall;
window.location.href = window.location.href;
}
});
</script></body></html>
